Operation Manual
Sewing and Embroidery Machine
Product Code: 882-W73
Be sure to read this document before using the machine.
We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference. The latest manuals are available at
Brother Support website ( https://s.brother/cmead/ ).
1
Thank you for purchasing this machine. Before using this
machine, carefully read the “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the
correct operation of the various functions.
In addition, after you have finished reading this manual,
store it where it can quickly be accessed for future
reference.
Please read these safety instructions before attempting to
use the machine.
DANGER
- To reduce the risk of electric shock
1Always unplug the machine from the
electrical outlet immediately after using,
cleaning, making any user servicing
adjustments mentioned in this manual,
or if you are leaving the machine
unattended.
WARNING
- To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electrical shock, or
injury to persons.
2Always unplug the machine from the electrical
outlet, or when making any adjustments mentioned
in the instruction manual.
• To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the
symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the
plug and pull it out of the electrical outlet. Do not
pull on the cord.
• Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
Do not use an extension cord.
• Always unplug your machine if there is a power
failure.
3Electrical Hazards:
• This machine should be connected to an AC power
source within the range indicated on the rating
label. Do not connect it to a DC power source or
inverter. If you are not sure what kind of power
source you have, contact a qualified electrician.
• This machine is approved for use in the country of
purchase only.
4Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord
or plug, if it is not working properly, has been
dropped or damaged, or water is spilled on the unit.
Return the machine to the nearest authorized
Brother dealer for examination, repair, electrical or
mechanical adjustment.
• While the machine is stored or in use if you notice
anything unusual, such as an odor, heat,
discoloration or deformation, stop using the
machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
• When transporting the machine, be sure to carry it
by its handle. Lifting the machine by any other part
may damage the machine or result in the machine
falling, which could cause injuries.
• When lifting the machine, be careful not to make
any sudden or careless movements, which may
cause a personal injury.
5Always keep your work area clear:
• Never operate the machine with any air openings
blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the machine
and the foot controller free from the build up of lint,
dust, and loose cloth.
• Do not store objects on the foot controller.
• Never drop or insert foreign object into any
opening.
• Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are
being used or where oxygen is being administered.
• Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as
a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord
or garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire
or an electric shock.
• Do not place this machine on an unstable surface,
such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the
machine may fall, resulting in injuries.
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
2
6Special care is required when sewing:
• Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use
bent or damaged needles.
• Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special
care is required around the machine needle.
• Switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to
turn it off when making any adjustments in the
needle area.
• Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as
it could cause the needle to break.
• Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and
follow careful instruction when free motion stitching
so that you do not deflect the needle and cause it to
break.
7This machine is not a toy:
• Your close attention is necessary when the machine
is used by or near children.
• This product contains small parts. Keep the product
out of the reach of children to prevent accidental
ingestion of small parts.
• The plastic bag that this machine was supplied in
should be kept out of the reach of children or
disposed of. Never allow children to play with the
bag due to the danger of suffocation.
• Do not use the seam ripper in any other way than
how it is intended.
• Do not use outdoors.
8For a longer service life:
• When using and storing this machine, avoid direct
sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or
store the machine near a space heater, iron, halogen
lamp, or other hot objects.
• Do not use cleansers or organic solvents, such as
thinner, petroleum ether or alcohol, to clean the
machine. Otherwise, the finish may peel off or
become scratched.
• Always consult the Operation Manual when
replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser
feet, needle, or other parts to assure correct
installation.
9For repair or adjustment:
• If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by
an authorized Brother dealer.
• In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is
required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the
back of the Operation Manual to inspect and adjust
the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please
consult your local authorized Brother dealer.
Use this machine only for its intended use as described
in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as
contained in this manual.
The contents of this manual and specifications of this
product are subject to change without notice.
For additional product information and updates, visit
our website at www.brother.com
SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
This machine is intended
for household use.
FOR USERS IN COUNTRIES EXCEPT
EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
This appliance is not intended for use
by persons (including children) with
reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities, or lack of experience and
knowledge, unless they have been
given supervision or instruction
concerning use of the appliance by a
person responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to
ensure that they do not play with the
appliance.
FOR USERS IN EUROPEAN
COUNTRIES
This appliance can be used by children
aged from 8 years and above and persons
with reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities or lack of experience and
knowledge if they have been given
supervision or instruction concerning use
of the appliance in a safe way and
understand the hazards involved. Children
shall not play with the appliance.
Cleaning and user maintenance shall not
be made by children without supervision.
3
FOR USERS IN THE UK,
EIRE, MALTA AND
CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
• In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse
approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the
mark, rating as marked on plug.
• Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with
the fuse cover omitted.
• If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the
plug supplied with this equipment, you should
contact your authorized Brother dealer to obtain the
correct lead.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC)
Supplier’s Declaration of
Conformity (For U.S.A.
Only)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the authorized Brother dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operated
in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Important
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should
be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
20cm or more away from person's body.
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
200 Crossing Boulevard
P.O. Box 6911
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911
USA
TEL : (908) 704-1700
declares that the product
Product Name:
Model Number:
Brother Sewing Machine
XJ2
4
For Users in Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt
RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS-102
of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment
should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
20cm or more away from person's body.
For Users in Mexico
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause
harmful interference, and
(2) this equipment or device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Para usuarios en México
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos
condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencias perjudiciales y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
Declaration of Conformity
(Europe and Turkey only)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that this product is in
conformity with the essential requirements of all relevant
directives and regulations applied within the European
Community.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother Support website. Visit support.brother.com
Declaration of Conformity
for RE Directive 2014/53/
EU (Europe and Turkey
only)
(Applicable to models with
radio interfaces)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the provisions of the RE Directive 2014/53/
EU.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother Support website. Visit support.brother.com
Wireless LAN (Models with
Wireless LAN function
only)
This machine supports wireless interface.
Frequency band(s): 2400-2483.5 MHz
Maximum radio-frequency power transmitted in the
frequency band(s): Less than 20 dBm(e.i.r.p)
UK Declaration of
Conformity
(Great Britain only)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the relevant UK legislation.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother Support website. Visit support.brother.com
UK Declaration of
Conformity for Radio
Equipment Regulation
2017
(Great Britain only)
(Applicable to models with
radio interfaces)
We, Brother Industries, Ltd. 15-1 Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku,
Nagoya 467-8561 Japan declare that these products are in
conformity with the provisions of the Radio Equipment
Regulation 2017.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) can be downloaded
from Brother Support website. Visit support.brother.com
For Users in Norway
This subsection does not apply for the geographical area
within a radius of 20 km from the centre of Ny-Alesund on
Svalbard.
Dette underavsnittet gjelder ikke for det geografiske området
innenfor en radius av 20 km fra sentrum av Ny-Ålesund på
Svalbard.
5
Laser Notices (For U.S.A.
only)
Laser Safety
This sewing machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the
Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This
means that the sewing machine does not produce hazardous
laser radiation.
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC
60825-1:2007 and IEC 60825-1:2014 specifications.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this
machine is restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the
machine contains 6-milliwatt, 630-640 nanometer
wavelength, 6-12 degree at parallel divergence angle, 28-40
degree at perpendicular divergence angle, InGaAlP laser
diodes. Therefore, eye damage may result from disassembling
or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any
possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
FDA Regulations
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured on and after
August 2, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products
marketed in the United States. The label shown on the back of
the sewing machine indicates compliance with the FDA
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed
in the United States.
Laser Notices (For
European countries)
EN 60825-1:2014+A11:2021 and EN
50689:2021 Specification
This machine is Class 1 consumer laser product in EN 60825-
1:2014+A11:2021 and EN 50689:2021 specifications.
This laser indicates the needle drop point.
Laser Notices (For
countries except U.S.A.
and European countries)
IEC 60825-1 Specification
This machine is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC
60825-1:2007 and IEC 60825-1:2014 specifications.
For countries except
U.S.A.
The laser beam emitted by the laser unit installed in this machine is
restricted to an output at a safe level. However, the machine
contains 6-milliwatt, 630-640 nanometer wavelength, 6-12 degree
at parallel divergence angle, 28-40 degree at perpendicular
divergence angle, InGaAlP laser diodes. Therefore, eye damage
may result from disassembling or altering this machine.
Safety precautions have been designed to prevent any
possible laser beam exposure to the operator.
Brother Industries, Ltd.
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561,
JAPAN
This product complies with FDA performance standards
for laser products except for conformance with IEC
60825-1 Ed. 3., as described in Laser Notice No. 56,
dated May 8, 2019.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or the
performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION
• This sewing machine has a Class 3B Laser
Diode in the Laser Unit. The Laser Unit should
not be opened under any circumstances.
• Use of controls, adjustments or the
performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
CLASS 1 CONSUMER
LASER PRODUCT
EN 50689:2021
6
WPA™ and WPA2™ are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on
Brother products, related documents and any other materials are all
trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
This product includes software developed by the following
vendor: ©2008 Devicescape Software, Inc.
This product includes open-source software.
To see the open source licensing remarks, please go to the
manual download section on your model’s home page of
Brother Support website at https://s.brother/cpeae/
.
Make sure you use a router or firewall when connecting
your machine to the Internet to protect it against
unauthorized access from the Internet.
TRADEMARKS
COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE
OPEN SOURCE LICENSING
REMARKS
PRECAUTION FOR WIRELESS
CONNECTION
CONTENTS
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Chapter 1 GETTING READY 9
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS................................ 9
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES ................................. 11
Using the Multi-Purpose Screwdriver (Included with Some
Models)................................................................................ 12
Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some Models) ........... 12
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF .................. 14
LCD SCREEN ...................................................... 16
Using the Machine Settings Key ........................................... 20
Using the Machine Help ...................................................... 24
Using the Stitch Pattern Explanation Function ...................... 26
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION
FUNCTIONS ...................................................... 27
Operations Available with a Wireless Network Connection
... 27
Enabling a Wireless Network Connection ............................ 28
Using the Wizard to Set Up the Wireless Network
Connection .......................................................................... 28
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE
MACHINE .......................................................... 30
Using a USB Mouse ............................................................. 30
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN.............. 30
Winding the Bobbin............................................................. 30
Setting the Bobbin................................................................ 34
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread.............................................. 35
UPPER THREADING .......................................... 36
Upper Threading.................................................................. 36
Using the Twin Needle Mode .............................................. 39
Using the Spool Stand.......................................................... 41
CHANGING THE NEEDLE.................................. 42
FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE COMBINATIONS .... 44
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT ...................... 45
Replacing the Presser Foot ................................................... 45
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included Adapter .......... 45
Using the Compact Dual Feed Foot ..................................... 46
Chapter 2 SEWING BASICS 49
SEWING ............................................................. 49
Stitch Types ......................................................................... 49
Basic Sewing........................................................................ 49
Using Advanced Multi-Function Foot Controller
(Included with Some Models)............................................... 51
Combining Stitch Patterns .................................................... 53
Sewing Reverse Stitches/Reinforcement Stitches................... 55
Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement Stitching ......................... 55
Automatic Presser Foot Lowering Function and Thread Cutting
Function .............................................................................. 57
STITCH SETTINGS.............................................. 57
Setting the Stitch Width/Stitch Length/“L/R Shift”.................. 57
Setting the Thread Tension................................................... 58
Saving Your Stitch Settings................................................... 59
USEFUL FUNCTIONS......................................... 60
Automatic Thread Cutting .................................................... 60
Adjusting the Needle Drop Point with the Guideline Marker
... 60
Pivoting ............................................................................... 61
Using the Knee Lifter............................................................ 62
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic Presser Foot
Pressure) .............................................................................. 62
Needle Position - Stitch Placement ...................................... 62
Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and the Straight
Stitch Foot............................................................................ 63
USEFUL SEWING TIPS ....................................... 64
Sewing Tips ......................................................................... 64
Sewing Various Fabrics ........................................................ 65
Sewing Decorative Stitch Patterns ........................................ 66
Chapter 3 VARIOUS STITCHES 67
UTILITY STITCHES............................................. 67
Straight Stitches.................................................................... 67
Zigzag Stitches ..................................................................... 71
Overcasting.......................................................................... 72
Quilting................................................................................ 73
Blind Hem Stitches............................................................... 79
Shell Tuck Stitches ............................................................... 81
Scallop Stitches .................................................................... 81
Smocking Stitches ................................................................ 81
Fagoting ............................................................................... 82
Attaching Tape or Elastic ...................................................... 82
One-Step Buttonholes .......................................................... 83
Four-Step Buttonholes .......................................................... 85
Bar Tacks ............................................................................. 88
Button Sewing...................................................................... 89
Eyelet ................................................................................... 90
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and Zigzag Stitch)
... 90
Zipper Insertion.................................................................... 91
Changing the Start and End Angles of the Stitch Pattern (Stitch
Tapering Function) ............................................................... 93
MAKING ADJUSTMENTS .................................. 95
MAKING STEP STITCH PATTERNS (FOR 7MM
SATIN STITCH PATTERNS ONLY) ..................... 96
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION ................... 97
Saving Stitch Patterns ........................................................... 97
Retrieving Stitch Patterns...................................................... 98
MY CUSTOM STITCH........................................ 99
Retrieving Saved Stitch Patterns.......................................... 101
Chapter 4 BASIC EMBROIDERY 103
BEFORE EMBROIDERING................................ 103
Embroidery Step by Step..................................................... 103
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer............ 103
About the Embroidery Unit................................................. 104
SELECTING PATTERNS .................................... 105
Selecting Embroidery Patterns ............................................ 106
Selecting Character Patterns ............................................... 107
Selecting Frame Patterns..................................................... 109
Combining Patterns............................................................ 109
EDITING PATTERNS ........................................ 111
Previewing the Pattern........................................................ 113
Changing the Size and the Density of the Pattern ............... 114
Creating Repeated Patterns................................................. 114
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly.................................. 118
Deselect Region Setting (No Sew Setting) ........................... 119
EDITING COLORS........................................... 120
Changing the Thread Color ................................................ 120
Finding New Color Schemes with the Color Shuffling
Function............................................................................. 121
Thread Color Sorting .......................................................... 123
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN............ 124
PREPARING THE FABRIC ................................ 126
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to the Fabric........... 126
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame ..................... 127
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME ........ 129
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION ....... 130
Checking the Needle Drop Point with the Embroidery Foot “W+”
with LED Pointer ................................................................ 130
Displaying a Background Image ......................................... 131
Checking the Pattern Position............................................. 132
THE 2-POINT EMBROIDERY POSITIONING
FUNCTION...................................................... 133
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN.......................... 137
Embroidering Attractive Finishes ........................................ 137
Embroidering Patterns ........................................................ 138
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
8
Using Appliqués................................................................. 139
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY
PROCESS............................................................ 141
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Runs out of Thread During
Embroidering...................................................................... 141
Resuming Embroidery after Turning off the Power .............. 141
Chapter 5 ADVANCED EMBROIDERY 143
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS........ 143
Basting Embroidery ............................................................ 143
Creating an Appliqué Piece................................................ 144
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS ......... 147
Adjusting Thread Tension................................................... 147
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case (with No Color on the
Screw)................................................................................ 148
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting Function
(End Color Trim)................................................................. 149
Using the Thread Trimming Function (Jump Stitch Trim) .... 150
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed......................................... 150
Changing the Thread Color Display.................................... 151
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle................................... 151
Embroidering Linked Characters......................................... 152
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION.................. 153
Saving Embroidery Patterns ................................................ 153
Retrieving Embroidery Patterns........................................... 154
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS......................... 155
Using a Frame Pattern To Make an Appliqué...................... 155
Embroidering Couching Patterns ........................................ 156
Creating Stippling, Echo Quilting, or Decorative Fill Patterns
around a Design................................................................. 159
Embroidering Split Embroidery Patterns.............................. 160
Chapter 6 MY DESIGN CENTER 161
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER .......................... 161
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN ......................... 161
Before Creating Designs ..................................................... 163
Drawing Lines.................................................................... 163
Drawing Regions................................................................ 164
Using the Stamp Key .......................................................... 165
Using the Erase Key............................................................ 166
Using the Select Key........................................................... 166
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN.............................. 167
Specifying Individual Stitch Settings ................................... 167
Specifying Global Stitch Settings ........................................ 168
Loading the Background Image .......................................... 169
LINE CONVERSION ......................................... 170
Create a Pattern with Line Conversion................................ 170
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION........................ 172
Create a Pattern with Illustration Conversion ...................... 172
STIPPLING........................................................ 174
Basic Stippling with My Design Center............................... 174
Decorative Stitching around a Pattern in Embroidery
(a Quilting Function) .......................................................... 176
MY STITCH MONITOR APP............................. 178
MY DESIGN SNAP APP .................................... 179
ARTSPIRA APP COMPATIBLE ............................ 180
Chapter 7 APPENDIX 181
CARE AND MAINTENANCE............................. 181
Cleaning the LCD............................................................... 181
Cleaning the machine surface ............................................ 181
Restrictions on Oiling......................................................... 181
Precautions on Storing the Machine ................................... 181
Cleaning the Race ............................................................. 181
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area...................... 182
BEFORE LENDING OR DISPOSING OF THE
PRODUCT ........................................................ 183
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN................................ 183
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning........................................... 183
TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 184
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics....................................... 184
Upper Thread is Too Tight ................................................. 184
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric........................... 184
Incorrect Thread Tension................................................... 185
Fabric is Caught in the Machine and Cannot Be Removed
... 185
If the Thread Becomes Tangled Under the Bobbin
Winder Seat....................................................................... 186
List of Symptoms................................................................ 187
ERROR MESSAGES........................................... 192
SPECIFICATIONS............................................. 194
UPDATING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE... 196
Update Procedure Using USB Media ................................. 196
Update Procedure Using Wireless LAN Connection .......... 196
STITCH SETTING CHART ................................ 197
INDEX.............................................................. 204
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
GETTING READY
9
1
Main Parts
1 Top cover
2 Pretension disk (page 32)
3 Thread guide for bobbin winding (page 31)
4 Spool pin (page 37)
5 Spool cap (page 30)
6 Supplemental spool pin (page 30)
7 Bobbin winder (page 30)
8 LCD (liquid crystal display) (page 16)
9 Speaker
0 Knee lifter (page 62)
A Knee lifter slot (page 62)
B Operation buttons and sewing speed controller
(page 10)
C Flat bed attachment with accessory compartment
(page 11)
D Thread cutter (page 38)
E Thread guide plate (page 33)
F Connector for the presser foot (page 46, page 104)
G Handle
Carry the machine by its handle when transporting the
machine.
H Presser foot lever
You cannot use the presser foot lever after the presser foot has
been raised using (Presser foot lifter button).
I Air vent
The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate.
Do not cover the air vent while the machine is being used.
J Main power switch (page 14)
K Foot controller (page 51)
L Power cord receptacle (page 14)
M Foot controller jack (page 51)
N USB port for mouse (page 30)
O USB port
P Handwheel
Turn the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise and
lower the needle.
Needle and Presser Foot Section
1 Buttonhole lever (page 84)
2 Presser foot holder screw (page 45, page 103)
3 Presser foot holder (page 45)
4 Presser foot locking pin (page 65)
5 Presser foot
The presser foot consistently applies pressure to the fabric as
sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for the
selected stitch.
6 Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.
7 Bobbin cover (page 34)
8 Needle plate (page 68)
9 Needle bar thread guide (page 37)
0 Needle clamp screw (page 43)
Chapter 1
GETTING READY
Note
• Be sure to install the latest software.
Refer to “UPDATING YOUR MACHINE’S
SOFTWARE” on page 196.
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
NAMES OF MACHINE PARTS
10
Measurements on the needle plate and the bobbin cover
(with mark)
The measurements on the bobbin cover and needle plate are
references for stitch patterns with a left or middle (center)
needle position.
1 For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
2 For stitches with a left needle position
3 Left needle position on the needle plate <inch>
4 Left needle position on the needle plate <cm>
5 Middle (center) needle position on the bobbin cover
(with mark) <inch>
6 Middle (center) needle position on the needle plate
Embroidery unit
1 Carriage
The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when
embroidering.
2 Release lever (located under the embroidery unit)
Press the release lever to remove the embroidery unit.
3 Embroidery frame holder
Insert the embroidery frame into the embroidery frame holder
to hold the frame in place.
4 Frame-securing lever
Press the frame-securing lever down to secure the embroidery
frame.
5 Embroidery unit connection
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the connection port
when attaching the embroidery unit.
Operation Buttons
1 “Start/Stop” button
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start or stop sewing. The
button changes color according to the machine’s operation
mode.
2 Reverse stitch button
Press the reverse button to sew reverse or reinforcement
stitches depending on the selected stitch pattern. (page 55)
3 Reinforcement stitch button
Press the reinforcement button to sew a single stitch
repeatedly and tie-off. (page 55)
For character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with
a full stitch instead of at a mid-point.
The LED beside the button automatically lights up while the
stitch is being sewn and goes off when sewing is finished.
4 Needle position button
Press the needle position button to raise or lower the needle
position. Pressing the button twice sews a single stitch.
5 Thread cutter button
Press the thread cutter button after sewing to automatically
trim the excess thread.
6 Presser foot lifter button
Press the presser foot lifter button to lower the presser foot and
apply pressure to the fabric. Press this button again to raise the
presser foot.
7 Sewing Speed controller
Use the sewing speed controller to adjust the sewing speed.
Move the slide to the left to sew at slower speeds. Move the
slide to the right to sew at higher speeds.
8 Automatic threading button
Use the automatic threading button to automatically thread the
needle.
a
e
dc
b
Green: The machine is ready or is operating.
Red: The machine is not ready.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
GETTING READY
11
1
For included accessories of your machine, refer to the
additional sheet “Included Accessories”.
Using the Flat Bed Attachment
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the
accessory compartment.
1 Presser foot storage tray
2 Presser foot storage space of the flat bed attachment
Using the Accessory Case (Included with Some
Models)
Opening the accessory case
Fully slide the bar on each side of the accessory case to
the unlocked position, and then lift off the lid to open the
case.
The case can only be opened or locked correctly if both
bars are slid in the same direction.
1 Bars
Closing the accessory case
a
Fully slide the bar on each side of the accessory case
lid to the unlocked position.
b
Place the lid on top of the case so that the notches in
the lid align with the tabs on the case, and then slide
the bar on each side back to the locked position.
Storing Bobbin Clips
Bobbin clips can be stored inside of the accessory case
cover.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
a
b
a
Memo
• Placing bobbin clips on bobbins helps prevent the
thread from unwinding from the bobbin. In
addition, snapping bobbin clips together allows the
bobbins to be conveniently stored and prevents
them from rolling around if they are dropped.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
12
Using the Multi-Purpose Screwdriver
(Included with Some Models)
Since the screwdriver can be changed to three different
positions, it can be extremely useful for the various machine
preparations. With this machine, position “1” and position
“3” are used.
Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some
Models)
The included spool stand is useful when using thread spools
with a large diameter (cross-wound thread). The spool stand
can hold two spools of thread.
How to Assemble the Spool Stand
a
Fully extend the telescopic thread guide shaft, and then
rotate the shaft until the two internal stoppers click
into place.
b
Insert the telescopic thread guide into the round hole
at the center of the spool support, and then use a
screwdriver to securely tighten the screw from the
reverse side.
1 Screw
Position “1” You can install/remove the presser foot holder,
needle clamp screw or needle plate.
Position “3” The multi-purpose screwdriver can be
positioned over the screw on the embroidery
frame to tighten the screw after hooping the
fabric or when removing the fabric.
123
456
789
No. Part Name
1 Telescopic thread guide
2 Spool support
3 Spool pin × 2
4 Screw and washer
5Spool cap (XL) × 2
6Spool holder × 2
7 Spool cap base × 2
8Spool felt × 2
9Ring × 4
IMPORTANT
• Do not lift the handle of the machine while the
spool stand is installed.
• Do not push or pull the telescopic thread
guide or spool pins with extreme force,
otherwise damage may result.
• Do not place any object other than spools of
thread on the spool support.
• Do not try to wind thread on the bobbin while
sewing using the spool stand.
Note
• Make sure that the stoppers on the telescopic
thread guide shaft are firmly in place and that the
thread guide openings are directly above the two
holes for spool pins in the spool support. In
addition, check that the shaft is securely tightened
in the spool support.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
GETTING READY
13
1
c
Firmly insert the two spool pins into the two holes in
the spool support.
d
Open the upper cover of the machine, and then pull
the upper cover up to remove it from the machine.
e
Insert the spool stand onto the notches of the machine.
How To Remove
a
Pull the spool stand up to remove it from the machine.
b
Attach the upper cover to the machine.
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
14
a
Insert the power supply cord into the power cord
receptacle, then insert the plug into a wall outlet.
1 Main power switch
2 Power supply cord
b
Turn the main power switch to “I” to turn on the
machine.
c
When the machine is turned on, the opening movie is
played. Touch anywhere on the screen.
d
Turn the main power switch to “O” to turn off the
machine.
Setting Your Machine for the First Time
When you first turn on the machine, set the language and
time/date to your language and local time/date.
a
Touch and to set your local language and then
touch .
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
WARNING
• Use only regular household electricity for the
power source. Using other power sources may
result in fire, electric shock, or damage to the
machine.
• Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric
shock may result.
• Make sure that the plugs on the power cord
are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet
and the power cord receptacle on the
machine. Otherwise, a fire or electric shock
may result.
• Turn the main power to OFF and remove the
plug in the following circumstances:
• When you are away from the machine
• After using the machine
• When the power fails during use
• When the machine does not operate correctly
due to a bad connection or a disconnection
• During electrical storms
CAUTION
• Use only the power cord included with this
machine.
• Do not use extension cords or multi-plug
adapters with many other appliances plugged
in to them. Fire or electric shock may result.
• When unplugging the machine, always turn
the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the
plug to remove it from the outlet. Pulling on
the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire
or electric shock.
• Do not allow the power cord to be cut,
damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled,
twisted, or bundled. Do not place heavy
objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to
heat. These things may damage the cord, or
cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug
is damaged, take the machine to your
authorized Brother dealer for repairs before
continuing use.
• Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to
be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a
fire may result.
•(For U.S.A only)
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade
wider than the other). To reduce the risk of
electrical shock, this plug is intended to fit in a
polarized electrical outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the electrical
outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit,
contact a qualified electrician to install the
proper electrical outlet. Do not modify the
plug in any way.
Memo
• The light, LCD and the “Start/Stop” button light up
when the machine is turned on. The machine will
make a sound. This is not a malfunction.
a
b
TURNING THE MACHINE ON/OFF
GETTING READY
15
1
b
The message screen, confirming if you want to set
time/date, appears. Touch .
c
Touch or to set time/date. And then touch
.
1 Select [ON] to display time/date on the screen.
2 Touch or to select the date display format.
3 Set the year (YYYY), month (MM) and date (DD).
4 Select whether 24h or 12h setting will display.
5 Set the current time.
The clock starts from 0 second of the time you set.
d
The following message about a wireless LAN
connection appears. To set up a connection, touch
, and then refer to steps
c through f in
“Using the Wizard to Set Up the Wireless Network
Connection” on page 28 to finish setting up a wireless
LAN connection.
Memo
• The time/date you set may be cleared, if you don't
turn on the machine for an extended period of time.
3
1
4
5
2
LCD SCREEN
16
Touch the LCD screen or a key with your finger or the
included touch pen to select a machine function.
Home Page Screen
LCD SCREEN
IMPORTANT
• Only touch the screen with your finger or the
touch pen (stylus) included with the machine.
Do not use a mechanical pencil, screwdriver
or any other hard or sharp object. In addition,
do not press the screen with extreme pressure.
Otherwise the screen may be damaged.
Note
• All or part of the screen may sometimes become
darker or lighter due to changes in the surrounding
temperature or other changes in the environment.
This is not a sign of a malfunction. If the screen is
difficult to read, adjust its brightness.
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
1 Select a utility stitch or character/
decorative stitch pattern.
49
Sewing key
2 Select an embroidery pattern.
Attach the embroidery unit.
105
Embroidery
key
3 Create an original embroidery
pattern.
161
My Design
Center key
4 Shows the machine’s signal
strength. Touch this key to specify
the wireless settings.
If there is a new update file, the
key appears as .
22, 28
Wireless LAN
key
2
3
1
0
4 5 6 7 8 9
5 Change the needle stop position,
adjust the pattern or screen, and
change other machine settings.
20
Machine
settings key
6 See explanations on how to use
the machine. You can see the
tutorial videos and also MP4
movie files that you have saved on
USB media.
24
Machine help
key
7 Touch this key before changing
the needle, the presser foot, etc.
This key locks all key and button
functions to prevent operation of
the machine.
34, 42,
45
Presser foot/
Needle
exchange key
8 Lock the screen. When the screen
is locked, you can still sew, but
cannot change any of the screen
functions. Touch this key again to
unlock the screen.
—
Screen lock
key
9 Return to the home page screen at
any time and select a different
category - [Sewing], [Embroidery]
or [My Design Center].
—
Home page
screen key
0 Set the time/date. 14
Time/Date key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
LCD SCREEN
GETTING READY
17
1
Utility Stitch Screen Character/Decorative Stitch Screen
No. Display Name Explanation Page
1 Utility stitch key Select a straight stitch, zigzag stitch, buttonhole, blind hem stitch, or other
stitch (utility stitch) commonly used in garment making.
49
2 Character/Decorative
stitch key
Select character or decorative stitch patterns. 49
3 Needle position
setting
Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop position. 39, 61
4 Presser foot Shows the presser foot to be used. Attach the presser foot indicated here
before sewing.
* The symbols for certain presser feet, such as zipper foot “I”, may not
appear in the screen.
* Advanced monogramming foot “N+” is displayed as “N” on the screen.
45
5 Selected stitch
display
Shows the name and code number of the selected stitch. –
6 Stitch preview Shows a preview of the selected stitch. When shown at 100%, the stitch
appears in the screen at nearly its actual size.
–
7 Stitch pattern display
size
Shows the approximate size of the stitch pattern selected.
100%: Nearly the same size as the sewn stitch pattern
50%: 1/2 the size of the sewn stitch pattern
25%: 1/4 the size of the sewn stitch pattern
–
8 – Category Select the category of the stitch pattern you want to sew. 49
9
Page key
Touch or , to move the pages of stitch selection screen, one page
at a time. You can scroll up and down the pages by touching the screen.
–
0 Stitch selection
screen
Touch the key for the stitch pattern you want to sew. –
4
5
6
8
7
0 9
213
821
4
6
7
0
3
Single needle/down position Twin needle/down position
Single needle/up position Twin needle/up position
LCD SCREEN
18
Key Functions
Memo
• Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the displayed keys are
available when a stitch pattern is selected.
• The machine default setting is highlighted.
No. Display Name Explanation Page
1 Image key Display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern.
Touch to change the thread color in the image.
To display the enlarged image, touch .
To view any part of the image that extends out of the viewable display area,
touch / / / .
–
2 Free motion mode
key
Touch this key to enter free motion sewing mode.
The presser foot is raised to an appropriate height and the feed dog is lowered
for free motion quilting.
76
3 Horizontal mirror
image key
Create a horizontal mirror image of the stitch pattern. –
4 Needle mode
selection key (single/
double)
Touch this key to select twin needle mode. The sewing mode changes between
single needle mode and twin needle mode each time you touch the key.
• If the key is light gray after selecting the stitch, the selected stitch
cannot be sewn in the twin needle mode.
39
5 Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, touch this key to return to the beginning of the stitch. –
6 Single/Repeat sewing
key
Select single stitches or continuous stitches. To finish a complete motif while
sewing the stitch pattern continuously, you can touch this key while sewing.
The machine will automatically stop when the motif is finished.
97
7 Stitch tapering key Touch this key to change the start and end angles of the stitch pattern. 93
8 Retrieve key Retrieve a saved stitch pattern. 59
9 Manual memory key Change the stitch pattern settings (zigzag width and stitch length, thread
tension, etc.), then save them by touching this key. Five sets of settings can be
saved for a single stitch pattern.
59
0 Reset key Return the saved settings for the selected stitch pattern to their defaults. 59
A Thread tension key Shows the automatic thread tension setting of the currently selected stitch
pattern. You can use and to change the thread tension settings.
58
3
8
9
0
A
E
D
1
2
5
4
6
BC
G
F
H
7
D
E
2
5
6
3
J
K
4
L
M
ABC
F
G
H
1
I
N
LCD SCREEN
GETTING READY
19
1
B “L/R Shift” key
Touch to shift the stitch pattern to the right or touch to shift the stitch
pattern to the left. This feature is not available for all stitch patterns. Only those
applicable will be shifted.
58
C Stitch width and
stitch length key
Shows the zigzag width and stitch length settings of the currently selected
stitch pattern. You can use and to adjust the zigzag width and stitch
length settings.
57
D Guideline marker key Display the guideline marker along the sewing line. The guideline marker
makes it easier to align stitches with the fabric edge or other marker on the
fabric.
60
E Pivot key Turn on/off the pivot function. When the pivot function is selected, stopping the
machine lowers the needle and slightly raises the presser foot automatically. In
addition, when sewing is restarted, the presser foot is automatically lowered.
61
F Automatic thread
cutting key
Turn on this function to set the machine to automatically sew reinforcement
stitches (or reverse stitches, depending on the selected stitch pattern) at the
beginning and end of stitching and to trim the threads at the end of stitching.
60
G Automatic reverse/
reinforcement stitch
key
If you select this setting before sewing, the machine will automatically sew
reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end of sewing (depending on the
pattern, the machine may sew reverse stitches).
55
H Thread color change
key
Change the thread color in the image. –
I Memory key Save stitch pattern combinations. 97
J Vertical mirror image
key
Create a vertical mirror image of the stitch pattern. –
K Size selection key Select the size of the decorative stitch pattern or character stitch pattern (large,
small).
–
L Delete key Delete the selected stitch pattern. 54
M Some of the following keys will appear, depending on the selected stitch pattern.
Elongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, you can choose from 5 automatic
length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch length
settings.
–
Thread density key When the satin stitch patterns are selected, you can change the thread density
of the stitch pattern.
: Low density : High density
–
Character spacing
key
Change the spacing of character stitch patterns. The setting is applied to all
entered characters.
–
N Add stitch pattern key Touch this key when you want to combine decorative stitch patterns and/or
character stitch patterns.
54
No. Display Name Explanation Page
LCD SCREEN
20
Using the Machine Settings Key
Touch to change the default machine settings (needle
stop position, embroidery speed, opening display, etc.). To
display the different settings screens, touch for “Sewing
settings”, for “General settings”, for “Embroidery
settings” or for “Wireless LAN settings”.
Sewing Settings
1 Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to
determine the zigzag width (page 75).
When a straight stitch is selected, the sewing speed
controller can be used to change the needle position.
2 Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch
patterns (page 95).
3 Adjust the presser foot height. Select the height of the
presser foot when the presser foot is raised.
4 Adjust the presser foot pressure. The higher the number,
the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at [3]
for normal sewing.
5 Adjust the amount of fabric feeding of the compact dual
feed foot (page 47).
6 Select whether [1-01 Straight stitch (Left)] or [1-03
Straight stitch (Middle)] is the utility stitch that is
automatically selected when the machine is turned on.
7 Select whether utility stitches or quilting stitches
are displayed first in the stitch selection screen.
8 You can activate this setting after connecting the multi-
function foot controller (Included with Some Models).
(These settings appear when the multi-function foot
controller is connected to the machine.) (page 51)
9 Select the height of the presser foot when sewing is
stopped when the pivot setting is selected (page 61).
0 Select the height of the presser foot when the machine is
set to free motion sewing mode (page 76).
A When set to [ON], the thickness of the fabric is
automatically detected by an internal sensor while
sewing. This enables the fabric to be fed smoothly.
(page 62, page 65)
B When set to [ON], reinforcement stitches are sewn at the
beginning and/or end of sewing for a reinforcement
stitch pattern, even when (Reverse stitch button) is
pressed (page 55).
C Adjust the guideline marker position and brightness
(page 61).
D Select whether to lower the presser foot automatically
before starting sewing. (page 57)
E Select whether to raise the presser foot automatically
when stopping sewing. (page 57)
F Select whether touching (Thread cutter button)
automatically lowers the presser foot before cutting the
thread. The presser foot will be raised after the thread is
cut. (page 57)
G You can save the current settings screen image in a USB
media by touching this key when the USB media is
inserted into the USB port. The files are saved in a folder
labeled [bPocket].
H Reset settings on this page to original default. Some
settings are not reset.
Memo
• Touch or to display a different settings
screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
H
A
B
C
9
0
G
D
E
F
LCD SCREEN
GETTING READY
21
1
General Settings
1 Select the needle stop position (the needle position
when the machine is not operating) to be up or down.
2 Select the operation of the [Needle Position - Stitch
Placement] to [ON] or [OFF]. (page 62)
3 Select the shape of the pointer when a USB mouse is
used.
4 Turn both the upper and bobbin thread sensors [ON] or
[OFF]. If it is turned [OFF], the machine can be used
without thread.
5 Select the speaker volume. Increase the number for
louder volume, decrease for softer volume.
6 Select the brightness of the work area lights.
7 Select the screen display brightness.
8 Set the [Eco Mode] and the [Shutoff Support Mode] to
save the machine power (page 23).
9 Select the length of time until the screen saver appears.
0 Select the image of the screen saver (page 23).
A Select the initial screen that is displayed when the
machine is turned on.
B Select the display language.
C Use to certify your machine when you use [My
Connection] function with Brother cutting machine (sold
separately and limited to certain sales region). For
details, visit the following webpage and refer to the “My
Connection” Operation Manual. https://s.brother/cmead/
KIT I has been certified on this machine.
D Shows the service count which is a reminder to take your
machine in for regular servicing. (Contact your
authorized Brother dealer for details.)
E Shows the total number of stitches sewn on this
machine.
F Shows the internal machine number for this machine.
G Shows the program version.
H Erase all saved data, customized settings and network
information in the machine.
IMPORTANT
• When [Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor] is set
to [OFF], the machine cannot detect tangled
upper thread. Continuing to use the machine
with tangled thread may cause damage.
1
4
6
7
2
3
5
9
8
0
A
B
H
F
D
E
C
G
LCD SCREEN
22
Embroidery Settings
1 Select the embroidery frame to be used.
2 Select the center point marker or grid lines.
3 Select the thread color display on the embroidery
screen; thread number, color name. (page 151)
4 Select the thread brand of the thread color display.
(page 151)
5 Adjust the maximum embroidery speed (page 150).
6 Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering
(page 148).
7 Select the height of the embroidery foot during
embroidering (page 126).
8 Select the display units for embroidering (mm/inch).
9 Select the color of the background for the embroidery
display area.
0 Select the color of the background for the thumbnail
area.
A Select the size of pattern thumbnails.
B Adjust the distance between the pattern and the basting
stitching. (page 143)
C When set to [ON], pressing the “Start/Stop” button when
the embroidery foot is raised automatically lowers the
embroidery foot before starting embroidering.
D Adjust the position and brightness of the embroidery foot
“W+” with LED pointer (this setting is available if
embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer has been
attached.) (page 130).
Wireless LAN Settings
1 Enable/Disable the wireless LAN function (page 28).
2 Shows the connected SSID.
3 Set the machine to connect wireless LAN function.
4 Shows the machine name used on the wireless network.
5
Change the machine name used on the wireless network.
6 Check the wireless LAN status.
7 Display other menus.
8 Reset network operations.
9 Display the introduction to the applications. Touch the
key of the app whose information you want to display.
On smart devices with a QR reader app installed, scan
the QR code to display a screen that shows how to
install the app.
1
4
5
6
2
3
7
B
C
8
9
A
D
0
1
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
9
0
A
B
LCD SCREEN
GETTING READY
23
1
My Stitch Monitor: The machine’s embroidering status
can be monitored from your smart device. For details,
refer to “MY STITCH MONITOR APP” on page 178.
My Design Snap: You can position your embroidery
designs on the fabric, by capturing image of the hooped
fabric and sending the image to your machine. For
details, refer to “MY DESIGN SNAP APP” on page 179.
Artspira: You can transfer content published on the app
to the embroidery machine and enjoy creating original
works using the functions on the app.
0 If there is a new update program, download the update
file. (page 196)
A Display update program information. (page 196)
B Register the Artspira app. (page 180)
Setting the [Eco Mode] and the [Shutoff
Support Mode]
You can save the machine power by setting the [Eco
Mode] and the [Shutoff Support Mode].
If you leave the machine turned on without using it for the
set period of time, the machine enters in each mode.
Touch to display [Eco Mode] and [Shutoff Support
Mode]. (page 21)
[Eco Mode];
Machine will enter a sleep mode after the set period of
time. Touch the screen or press the “Start/Stop” button to
continue operating.
[Shutoff Support Mode];
Machine will enter the lower power mode after the set
period of time. Turn the machine off and then back on to
restart operating.
Changing the Screen Saver Image
Instead of the default image, you can select your own
personal images for the screen saver of your machine.
Before changing the screen saver image, prepare the
image on USB media. For details on compatible image
files, refer to “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 194.
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The general settings screen appears.
c
Display [Screen Saver] in the general settings screen.
d
Touch .
e
Touch .
f
Connect the USB media that contains your personal
image to the USB port of the machine.
g
Touch to select the first image.
h
Select the device that is connected.
A list of your personal images appears on the screen.
* : Delete the selected image.
* : Return to the previous page.
Memo
• If you turn off the machine while the machine is in
the [Eco Mode] or the [Shutoff Support Mode], wait
for about 5 seconds before turning on the machine
again.
• For details on condition of the [Eco Mode] and
[Shutoff Support Mode], refer to
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 194.
LCD SCREEN
24
i
Select a file name and then touch .
The selected image is stored on your machine.
* : Return to the previous page.
j
Repeat steps g through i to set the remaining
images.
k
Touch to return to the original screen.
Using the Machine Help
Touch to display the machine help screen. Functions
are available from the screen shown below.
1 Explanation for upper threading, winding the bobbin,
preparing to embroider a pattern, and how to use the
machine (page 25)
2 Procedures for sewing utility stitches (page 25)
3 Explanation of the stitch selected
4 Tutorial videos or MPEG-4 (MP4) videos (page 25,
page 26)
5 Display the introduction to the applications. Touch the
key of the app whose information you want to display.
On smart devices with a QR reader app installed, scan
the QR code to display a screen that shows how to
install the app.
My Stitch Monitor: The machine’s embroidering status
can be monitored from your smart device. For details,
refer to “MY STITCH MONITOR APP” on page 178.
My Design Snap: You can position your embroidery
designs on the fabric, by capturing image of the hooped
fabric and sending the image to your machine. For
details, refer to “MY DESIGN SNAP APP” on page 179.
Artspira: You can transfer content published on the app
to the embroidery machine and enjoy creating original
works using the functions on the app.
6 Introduction to ScanNCut (My Connection)
7 End-user license agreements (EULA)
Memo
• Touch [Default] to select default images for the
screen saver.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LCD SCREEN
GETTING READY
25
1
Using the Operation Guide Function
Touch to display the screen shown
below. Categories are displayed at the top of the screen.
Touch a key to see more information about that category.
Some of the functions are described in the movies. Watch
these movies for a better understanding of the functions.
1 Information about the main parts of the machine and
their functions
2 Information about the operation buttons
3 Information about threading the machine, changing
presser feet, etc.
4 Information about attaching the embroidery unit,
preparing fabric for embroidering, etc.
5 Information about troubleshooting
6 Information about cleaning the machine, etc.
Using the Sewing Guide Function
Use this function when you are not sure which stitch to
use for your application, or to get advice about sewing
particular stitches.
a
Enter Utility Stitch category from the home page.
b
Touch .
c
Touch .
The advice screen is displayed.
d
Touch the key of the category whose sewing
instructions you wish to view.
e
Read the explanations and select the appropriate
stitch.
The screen displays directions for sewing the
selected stitch. Follow the directions to sew the
stitch.
Playing a Tutorial Video
This machine provides tutorial videos on how to use the
machine.
a
Touch .
b
Touch .
c
Select the category and the tutorial video.
1 Category
2 Tutorial video
d
Play the tutorial video.
1 Number of seconds elapsed/Total number of seconds
2 Repeat
3 Return to beginning
4 Skip back 10 seconds
5 Play
6 Skip forward 10 seconds
7 Stop
8 Pause
9 Save to machine (when playing from USB media).
A video can be saved to (favorites) of the
machine, from where it can be played. When playing
from the machine’s memory, changes to .
Touch to delete the video.
e
After you are finished playing the video, touch .
2
4
6
1
3
5
Note
• The specifications shown in the movie may differ
from the ones on the actual product, in details.
• The movie includes optional parts not included with
this product.
21
1
9
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
LCD SCREEN
26
Playing MPEG-4 (MP4) Videos
Your MP4 videos can be played from USB media. In
addition, the MP4 video can be saved to the machine so
that a tutorial video on creating a project, for example,
can be viewed at any time. For details on supported file
extensions, refer to “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 194.
a
Touch .
b
Touch .
c
Select the device where the video is saved.
1 Tutorial videos
2 Videos saved on the machine (favorites)
3 Videos from USB media plugged into the USB port
4 Videos from USB media plugged into the USB port for
mouse
d
Select the video that you want to play.
e
Play the video.
* Use the operation keys as described in “Playing a
Tutorial Video” on page 25.
f
After you are finished playing the video, touch .
Using the Stitch Pattern Explanation
Function
If you want to know more about the uses of a stitch pattern,
select the pattern and touch and then
to see an explanation of the stitch
selection.
Example: Displaying information about
a
Touch .
b
Touch .
c
Touch .
The screen shows information.
d
Touch to return to the original screen.
Memo
• Some types of MP4 file cannot be played with the
machine.
Note
• Long file names may be shortened when they are
displayed.
1 2 3 4
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTIONS
GETTING READY
27
1
Operations Available with a Wireless
Network Connection
This machine supports a wireless network connection. The
following useful operations will be available if the machine is
connected to a wireless network.
For updating
Directly download the update file to the machine.
(page 196)
For embroidering
• Conveniently check the operating status of the
machine from your smart device by using the
dedicated mobile application (My Stitch Monitor).
• My Design Snap: You can position your embroidery
designs on the fabric, by capturing image of the
hooped fabric and sending the image to your
machine.
• Wirelessly transfer an embroidery pattern from your
computer to the machine by using the dedicated
Windows application (Design Database Transfer).
The application can be downloaded from the
following URL.
https://s.brother/caeka/
* Settings must be specified in Design Database
Transfer. For more information, refer to the manual
for Design Database Transfer.
• Wirelessly transfer to the machine an embroidery
pattern edited with embroidery editing software (PE-
DESIGN version 11 or later) on a computer. Also,
transfer to PE-DESIGN an embroidery pattern edited
on the machine.
* Settings must be specified in
PE-DESIGN. For more
information, refer to the manual for
PE-DESIGN.
• With Artspira App, you can transfer content
published on the app to the embroidery machine and
enjoy creating original works using the functions on
the app.
• When an updated version of the software is available
on our website, the wireless LAN key appears as
. (page 196)
WIRELESS NETWORK
CONNECTION FUNCTIONS
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTIONS
28
Enabling a Wireless Network Connection
The machine can be connected to your wireless network.
Refer to “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 194 for requirements for
a wireless network connection.
a
Touch .
b
Set [Wireless LAN Enable] to [ON].
The machine begins to emit the wireless network
signal.
Using the Wizard to Set Up the Wireless
Network Connection
There are multiple ways to set up the wireless network
connection. We recommend the method that uses the wizard
on this machine.
a
In order to connect your machine to a wireless
network, the security information (SSID and network
key) for your home network will be required. The
network key may also be called a password, security
key or encryption key. First, find your security
information and note it.
b
Touch beside [Wireless LAN Setup Wizard].
A list of available SSIDs appears.
c
Touch beside the SSID that was noted.
The screen for entering the network key (password)
appears.
SSID Network Key (Password)
Memo
• The wireless network connection cannot be set up
if you do not have the security information.
• How to find the security information
1 Check the manual provided with your home
network.
2 The default SSID may be the manufacturer's
name or the model name.
3 If you cannot find the security information,
contact the manufacturer of the router, your
network administrator or your Internet
provider.
4 Some SSIDs and network keys (passwords)
are case (upper case and lower case)
sensitive.
Please properly record your information.
Memo
• If the SSID that was noted does not appear in the
list, touch .
• If the desired network SSID is not displayed,
specify it as described below.
1 Select .
2 Enter the desired network SSID, and then
touch .
3 Select the authentication method and
encryption mode.
• If the machine had already been connected to the
home network, touch , and then select the
saved SSID.
WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTIONS
GETTING READY
29
1
d
Enter the network key (password) that was noted, and
then touch .
1 Text input area
2 Character keys
3 Caps key
4 Space key
5 Letters/numbers/symbols key
6 Backspace key (Deletes the character at the cursor's
position.)
7 Cursor keys (Move the cursor to the left or right.)
e
When the following message appears, touch .
When a connection is established, the following
message appears.
f
Touch to exit the setup.
The name beside [Machine name] is the name that
will be used when registering the machine with
embroidery editing software (PE-DESIGN version 11
or later) or Design Database Transfer in order to
transfer files.
Using the [Others] Menu To Set Up the
Wireless Network Connection
The [Others] menu contains the following items.
1 TCP/IP settings can be manually entered.
2 Shows the MAC address.
3 Use when proxy settings are required.
3
2
1
5
4
6
7
Memo
• While connected, the signal strength is indicated
by the icon in the upper-left corner of the display.
• Once a wireless network connection has been set
up, a connection will be established each time the
machine is turned on. However, [Wireless LAN
Enable] in the network settings screen must remain
set to [ON].
• The name in the [Machine name] field will be used
with the Artspira App (limited to certain sales
region), My Stitch Monitor App and My Design
Snap App.
1
2
3
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO THE MACHINE
30
Using a USB Mouse
A USB mouse, connected to the machine, can be used to
perform a variety of operations in the screens. Connect a USB
mouse to the USB port.
Clicking a Key
When the mouse is connected, the pointer appears on the
screen. Move the mouse to position the pointer over the
desired key, and then click the left mouse button.
1 Pointer
Winding the Bobbin
Using the Supplemental Spool Pin
With this machine, you can wind the bobbin during
sewing. While using the main spool pin to sew or
embroider, you can conveniently wind the bobbin using
the supplemental spool pin.
1 Supplemental spool pin
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the spring on the
bobbin winder shaft, and set the bobbin on the shaft.
1 Groove in the bobbin
2 Spring on the bobbin winder shaft
c
Place the spool of thread for the bobbin and the spool
cap onto the supplemental spool pin.
Slide the spool onto the supplemental spool pin so that
the thread unwinds to the front from the bottom.
Otherwise the thread may become tangled around the
supplemental spool pin.
1 The thread unwinds to the front from the bottom.
CONNECTING THE ACCESSORY TO
THE MACHINE
Memo
• Use a basic computer mouse to operate the
machine functions. Some USB mouse devices may
not be compatible with this machine.
1 USB port
2 USB mouse
Note
• The left mouse button can be used to perform
operations such as choosing a design and
choosing menu keys.
• The mouse pointer does not appear in the screen
saver or opening screen.
Memo
• Double-clicking has no effect.
a
b
1
WINDING/INSTALLING THE
BOBBIN
IMPORTANT
• Use the plastic bobbins that came with this
machine or bobbins of the same type: 11.5 mm
(approx. 7/16 inch) plastic Class 15 (A style)
bobbins, which are available from your
Brother dealer.
a
a
b
a
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
GETTING READY
31
1
d
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin as far as possible
to the right, with the rounded side on the left.
e
With your right hand, hold the thread near the thread
spool. With your left hand, hold the end of the thread,
and use both hands to pass the thread through the
thread guide.
1 Thread guide
IMPORTANT
• If the spool or the spool cap is not installed
correctly, the thread may become tangled
around the spool pin, and the machine may be
damaged.
• Three spool cap sizes are available, allowing
you to choose a spool cap that best fits the size
of spool being used. If the spool cap is too
small for the spool being used, the thread may
catch on the slit in the spool or the machine
may be damaged. When using mini king thread
spool, use the thread spool insert.
For details on thread spool insert (mini king
thread spool), refer to “Note” on page 31.
Note
• When using the spool as shown below, use the
thread spool insert (mini king thread spool). Make
sure that the thread spool insert is firmly inserted.
After installing it, pull out some thread, and check
that the thread unwinds without getting caught.
1 Thread spool insert
(mini king thread
spool)
2 Hole diameter 8.0
mm to 10.5 mm
(approx. 5/16 inch
to 13/32 inch)
3 Spool (cross-
wound thread)
• When using thread that winds off quickly, such as
transparent nylon thread or metallic thread, place
the spool net over the spool before placing the
spool of thread onto the spool pin.
If the spool net is too long, fold it to fit the size of
the spool.
1 Spool net
2 Thread spool
3 Spool pin
4 Spool cap
* When threading the spool with the spool net on,
make sure that 5-6cm (approx. 2 - 2-1/2 inches) of
thread is pulled out.
* It may be necessary to adjust the thread tension
when using the spool net.
a
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
32
f
Pass the thread around the pretension disk making sure
that the thread is under the pretension disk.
1 Pretension disk
Make sure that the thread passes under the
pretension disk.
2 Pretension disk
3 Pull it in as far as possible.
Check to make sure thread is securely set between
pretension disks.
g
Wind the thread clockwise around the bobbin 5 or 6
times, pass the thread through the guide slit in the
bobbin winder seat, and then pull the thread to cut it.
1 Guide slit in bobbin winder seat
(with built-in cutter)
h
Set the bobbin winding switch to the left, until it clicks
into place.
1 Bobbin winding switch
The bobbin winding window appears.
i
Touch .
1 Touch to decrease the winding speed.
2 Touch to increase the winding speed.
Bobbin winding starts. changes to
while the bobbin is winding. The bobbin stops
rotating when bobbin winding is completed. The
bobbin winding switch will automatically return to
its original position.
Note
• Be sure to wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin, otherwise the thread may become
wrapped around the bobbin winder shaft.
CAUTION
• Be sure to cut the thread as described. If the
bobbin is wound without cutting the thread
using the cutter built into the guide slit in the
bobbin winder seat, the thread may become
tangled in the bobbin or the needle may break
and cause injury when the bobbin thread starts
to run out.
a
b
c
a
Memo
• Touch to minimize the bobbin winding
window. Then, you can perform other operations,
such as selecting a stitch or adjusting the thread
tension, while the bobbin is being wound.
• Touch (in top right of the LCD screen) to
display the bobbin winding window again.
• The sound of winding the bobbin with stiff thread,
such as nylon thread for quilting, may be different
from the one produced when winding normal
thread; however, this is not a sign of a malfunction.
IMPORTANT
• When winding transparent nylon thread on the
bobbin, stop bobbin winding when the bobbin
is 1/2 to 2/3 full. If the bobbin was fully
wound with transparent nylon thread, it may
not be wound neatly, or sewing performance
may suffer. In addition, extreme pressure may
be applied to the bobbin, it may not be
possible to remove the bobbin from the bobbin
winder shaft, or the bobbin may break.
a
1 2
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
GETTING READY
33
1
j
After bobbin winding is finished, cut the thread with
scissors and remove the bobbin.
Using the Spool Pin
You can use the main spool pin to wind the bobbin before
sewing. You cannot use this spool pin to wind the bobbin
while sewing.
a
Turn the main power to ON and open the top cover.
b
Align the groove in the bobbin with the spring on the
bobbin winder shaft, and set the bobbin on the shaft.
1 Groove in the bobbin
2 Spring on the bobbin winder shaft
c
Remove the spool cap and place the spool of thread for
the bobbin onto the spool pin.
Slide the spool onto the spool pin so that the thread
unwinds to the front from the bottom.
1 Spool pin
2 Spool cap
3 Spool of thread
4 Spool felt
d
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin as far as possible
to the right, with the rounded side on the left.
e
While holding the thread with both hands, pass the
thread through grooves of the thread guide plate.
1 Thread guide plate
f
Pass the thread through the thread guide.
1 Thread guide
g
Pass the thread around the pretension disk making sure
that the thread is under the pretension disk.
Pull the thread as far as possible.
1 Pretension disk
2 Thread guide
h
Follow steps g through j on page 32 through
page 33.
IMPORTANT
• When removing the bobbin, do not pull on the
bobbin winder seat. Doing so could loosen or
remove the bobbin winder seat, and could
result in damage to the machine.
a
b
a
b
c
d
a
a
a
b
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
34
Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some
Models)
To wind thread on the bobbin while the spool stand is
installed, pass the thread from the spool through the
thread guide on the telescopic thread guide, and then
wind the bobbin according to steps
e through j of
“Using the Supplemental Spool Pin”on page 31 to
page 33.
Setting the Bobbin
a
Touch to lock all keys and buttons and raise the
presser foot.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
to continue.
b
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right.
1 Bobbin cover
2 Latch
The bobbin cover opens.
c
Remove the bobbin cover.
d
Hold the bobbin with your right hand and hold the end
of the thread with your left hand.
e
Set the bobbin in the bobbin case so that the thread
unwinds to the left.
IMPORTANT
• When winding thread on the bobbin, do not
cross the bobbin winding thread with the
upper thread in the thread guides.
CAUTION
• Use a bobbin that has been correctly wound
with thread, otherwise the thread tension may
be incorrect and the needle may break,
causing injuries.
• Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
sure to touch in the LCD to lock all keys
and buttons. Otherwise injuries may occur if
the “Start/Stop” button or any other button is
pressed and the machine starts sewing.
a
b
WINDING/INSTALLING THE BOBBIN
GETTING READY
35
1
f
Lightly hold down the bobbin with your right hand,
and then guide the end of the thread around the tab of
the needle plate with your left hand.
1 Tab
g
While lightly holding down the bobbin with your right
hand, guide the thread through the slit in the needle
plate and lightly pull it with your left hand.
1 Slit
h
While lightly holding down the bobbin with your right
hand, continue guiding the thread through the slit with
your left hand. Then, cut the thread with the cutter.
1 Cutter
The cutter cuts the thread.
i
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the bobbin
cover (1), and then lightly press down on the right
side to close the cover (2).
j
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
Pulling Up the Bobbin Thread
There may be some sewing applications where you want to
pull up the bobbin thread; for example, when making gathers,
darts, or doing free motion quilting or embroidery.
a
Follow steps a to e in “Setting the Bobbin” on
page 34 for installing the bobbin into the bobbin case.
b
Guide the bobbin thread through the groove, following
the arrow in the illustration.
* Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
* Do not replace the bobbin cover.
c
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
d
While lightly holding the upper thread with your left
hand, press (Needle position button) twice to
lower and then raise the needle.
e
Gently pull the upper thread. A loop of the bobbin
thread will come out of the hole in the needle plate.
Note
• Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your finger
and unwind the bobbin thread correctly, otherwise
the thread may break or the thread tension will be
incorrect.
Memo
• By pulling the thread in this way, the thread will
enter the tension spring of the bobbin case to apply
the appropriate tension to the bobbin thread during
sewing.
a
a
a
1
2
Memo
• You can begin sewing without pulling up the
bobbin thread. If you wish to pull up the bobbin
thread before starting to sew, pull up the thread
according to the procedure in “Pulling Up the
Bobbin Thread” on page 35.
Memo
• You can pull up the bobbin thread after threading
the upper thread (“UPPER THREADING” on
page 36).
UPPER THREADING
36
f
Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the presser
foot and pull it about 10 cm (approx. 4 inches) toward
the back of the machine, making it even with the upper
thread.
g
Reattach the bobbin cover.
Upper Threading
UPPER THREADING
CAUTION
• Be sure to thread the machine properly.
Improper threading can cause the thread to
tangle and break the needle, leading to injury.
IMPORTANT
• Never use a thread weight of 20 or lower. It
may cause the machine to malfunction. Use
the needle and the thread in the correct
combination. For details on the correct
combination of needles and threads, refer to
“FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE
COMBINATIONS” on page 44.
• When using 65/09 needle, manually thread the
needle. If the automatic needle threading
function is used, the unit may be damaged.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be used with
home sewing machine needle sizes 75/11 through
100/16.
• When threads such as transparent nylon
monofilament or specialty threads are used, it is
not recommended to use the needle threader.
• The automatic threading function cannot be used
with the twin needle.
UPPER THREADING
GETTING READY
37
1
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the
presser foot.
The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
1 Upper thread shutter
c
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
d
Remove the spool cap and place the spool of thread
onto the spool pin.
Slide the spool onto the spool pin so that the thread
unwinds to the front from the bottom.
1 Spool pin
2 Spool cap
3 Spool of thread
4 Spool felt
e
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin as far as possible
to the right, with the rounded side on the left.
f
While holding the thread with both hands, pass the
thread through grooves of the thread guide plate.
1 Thread guide plate
g
While holding the thread in your right hand, pass the
thread through the thread guide in the direction
indicated.
h
Guide the thread down, up, then down through the
groove, as shown in the illustration.
i
Pass the thread through the needle bar thread guide
(marked “6”) by holding the thread with both hands
and guiding it as shown in the illustration.
1 Needle bar thread guide
2 Tab
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to raise the needle before using the
automatic needle threader. Otherwise, the
needle may not thread correctly and the
needle threader may be damaged.
CAUTION
• Choose a spool cap that best fits the size of
spool being used. For more information, refer
to “Note” on page 31.
• If the spool or the spool cap is not positioned
correctly, the thread may become tangled
around the spool pin, possibly causing the
needle to break, resulting in injuries.
a
a
b
c
d
Memo
• Look in the upper groove area to check if the
thread catches on the thread take-up lever visible
inside the upper groove area.
a
a
b
UPPER THREADING
38
j
Pass the thread through the notch in the thread guide.
Then firmly pull the thread from front to back into the
slit of the thread guide disk (marked “7”).
1 Notch in thread guide
2 Thread guide disk
k
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to lower presser
foot.
l
Pull the thread up through the thread cutter to cut the
thread, as shown in the illustration.
1 Thread cutter
m
Press (Automatic threading button) to have the
machine automatically thread the needle.
The thread passes through the eye of the needle.
n
Carefully pull the end of the thread that was passed
through the eye of the needle.
* If a loop was formed in the thread passed through
the eye of the needle, carefully pull on the loop of
thread through to the back of the needle.
o
Raise the presser foot lever and pull out about 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches) of the thread, and then pass it under
the presser foot toward the rear of the machine.
1 About 10 cm (approx. 4 inches)
Note
• When using thread that quickly winds off the spool,
such as metallic thread, it may be difficult to thread
the needle if the thread is cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread cutter, pull
out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of thread after
passing it through the thread guide disks (marked
“7”).
1 About 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) or more
Memo
• When (Automatic threading button) is
pressed, the presser foot will be automatically
lowered. After threading is finished, the presser
foot moves back to the position before
(Automatic threading button) was pressed.
a
b
a
a
Memo
• If the needle could not be threaded or the thread
was not passed through the needle bar thread
guides, perform the procedure again starting from
step
c.
Note
• Some needles and threads cannot be threaded
with the needle threader. In this case, instead of
using the needle threader after passing the thread
through the needle bar thread guide (marked “6”),
manually pass the thread through the eye of the
needle from the front.
a
UPPER THREADING
GETTING READY
39
1
Using the Vertical Spool Pin (Included with
Some Models)
Use the vertical spool pin when using an irregularly
shaped thread spool, and when sewing with metallic
thread.
a
Insert the vertical spool pin onto the bobbin winder
shaft.
b
Install the spool felt and the thread spool in that order,
and then thread the upper thread.
Using the Twin Needle Mode
The twin needle can only be used for stitch patterns that show
after being selected. Before you select a stitch pattern,
make sure the stitch can be sewn in the twin needle mode
(refer to the “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page 197).
a
Touch to lock all keys and buttons and then
install the twin needle (“CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on
page 42).
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
to continue.
1 Bobbin winder shaft
2 Vertical spool pin
1 Spool felt
2 Thread spool
Memo
• When setting the thread spool, set it so that the
thread winds off from the front of the spool.
• If using metallic thread, we recommend that you
use a 90/14 home sewing machine needle.
• This method keeps the thread from twisting as it
comes off the spool pin.
b
a
b
a
CAUTION
• When using the twin needle, it is
recommended to use presser foot “J”.
Otherwise, the needle may break and cause
injury.
• Before changing the needle or threading the
machine, be sure to touch on the LCD
screen to lock all keys and buttons, otherwise
injuries may occur if the “Start/Stop” button
or any other button is pressed and the machine
starts sewing.
IMPORTANT
• Twin needle (size 2/11) is recommended for
this machine. Contact your authorized Brother
dealer for replacement needles.
Note
• When the twin needle is used, bunched stitches
may occur depending on the types of fabric and
thread that are used.
Use advanced monogramming foot “N+” or attach
stabilizer material.
UPPER THREADING
40
b
Thread the machine for the first needle according to
the procedure for threading a single needle (“Upper
Threading” on page 36).
c
Pass the thread through the needle bar thread guides
on the needle bar, then thread the needle on the left
side manually.
1 Needle bar thread guide
d
Pull up the supplemental spool pin and set it in the up
position. Place the additional spool of thread on the
supplemental spool pin, so that the thread unwinds
from the front. Push the spool cap onto the spool pin as
far as possible to secure the thread spool.
1 Spool cap
2 Spool pin
3 Spool of thread
e
Hold the thread from the spool with both hands, and
place the thread in the thread guide.
* Do not place the thread in the pretension disks.
1 Thread guide
f
While holding the thread from the spool, pull the
thread through the lower notch in the thread guide
plate, then through the upper notch. Hold the end of
the thread with your left hand, and then guide the
thread through the groove, following the arrows in the
illustration.
g
Continue threading; however, do not pass the thread in
the needle bar thread guide “6” on the needle bar.
Thread the needle on the right side.
1 Needle bar thread guide
h
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
i
Select a stitch pattern.
* Refer to “Basic Sewing” on page 49 for selecting a
stitch pattern.
* Refer to “STITCH SETTING CHART” on page 197
for the proper stitch to use with presser foot “J”.
j
Touch to select the twin needle mode.
1 Single needle/twin needle position setting display
appears.
IMPORTANT
• (Automatic threading button) cannot be
used. Manually thread the twin needle from
front to back. Using (Automatic threading
button) may result in damage to the machine.
a
a
b
c
a
CAUTION
• Be sure to set the twin needle mode when
using the twin needle. Using the twin needle
while the machine is in single needle mode
could cause the needle to break and cause
injury.
a
1
UPPER THREADING
GETTING READY
41
1
k
Start sewing.
Using the Spool Stand
The spool stand is useful when using thread on spools with a
large diameter (cross-wound thread). This spool stand can
hold two spools of thread.
Using the Spool Stand (Included with Some
Models)
a
Attach the spool stand to the machine. (page 12)
b
Place the spool of thread on the spool pin so that the
thread feeds off the spool clockwise. Firmly insert the
spool cap onto the spool pin.
Memo
• To change direction when sewing with the twin
needle, raise the needle from the fabric, raise the
presser foot lever, and then turn the fabric.
• Be sure to use a spool cap
that is slightly larger than the
spool.
If the spool cap that is used is
smaller or much larger than
the spool, the thread may
catch and sewing
performance may suffer.
• When using thread on a thin
spool, place the included
spool felt on the spool pin,
place the thread spool on the
spool pin so that the center of
the spool is aligned with the
hole at the center of the spool
felt, and then insert the spool
cap onto the spool pin.
1 Spool felt
• When using thread on a cone
spool, use the spool holder.
When using cone shaped
thread spool with other than
cotton thread, it is not
necessary to use spool caps.
1 Spool holder
• Depending on the size of
spool or the amount of thread
remaining, choose the
appropriate sized spool cap
(large or medium). Spool cap
(small) cannot be used with
the spool cap base.
1 Spool cap
2 Spool cap base
a
a
a
b
CAUTION
• Make sure that the spools do not touch each
other, otherwise the thread will not feed off
smoothly, the needle may break and cause
injury. In addition, make sure that the spools
do not touch the telescopic thread guide at the
center.
Note
• When using two spools of thread, make sure that
both spools are feeding in the same direction.
• Make sure that the thread is not caught under the
spool.
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
42
c
Pull the thread off the spool. Pass the thread from the
back to the front through the thread guides at the top.
When using thread that quickly feeds off the spool, such
as metallic thread, use the enclosed ring to prevent the
thread from becoming entangled.
Threading sequence; Pull the thread from the spool,
place the thread through the ring from the bottom up
(1), into the thread guide (2) and through the ring from
the top down (3). When using the ring, do not use the
spool cap base.
d
Pass the thread through the machine’s thread guide
from the right to the left.
1 Thread guide
e
Thread the machine according to the steps f to o of
“Upper Threading” on page 37.
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Touch to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
to continue.
Note
• Guide the thread so that it does not become
entangled with the other thread.
• After feeding the thread as instructed, wind any
excess thread back onto the spool, otherwise the
excess thread will become tangled.
2
1
3
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
CAUTION
• Always touch on the screen to lock all
keys and buttons before changing the needle.
If is not touched and the “Start/Stop”
button or another operation button is pressed
accidentally, the machine will start and injury
may result.
• Use only home sewing machine needles. Other
needles may break and may cause injury.
• Never use a bent needle. This may cause
injury.
Memo
• To check the needle correctly, place the flat side of
the needle on a flat surface. Check the needle from
the top and the sides. Throw away any bent
needles.
1 Parallel space
2 Flat surface (bobbin cover, glass, etc.)
• The machine needles are consumables. Replace
the needle in cases such as those described
below.
- If an unusual sound is produced when the needle
enters the fabric. (The tip of the needle may be
broken or dull.)
- If stitches are skipped. (The needle may be bent.)
- Generally, after completing one project, such as
a piece of clothing.
Note
• Before replacing the needle, cover the hole in the
needle plate with fabric or paper to prevent the
needle from falling into the machine.
a
b
CHANGING THE NEEDLE
GETTING READY
43
1
c
Remove the presser foot. (page 45)
d
Use the disc-shaped screwdriver to turn the needle
clamp screw toward you (counterclockwise) to loosen
the screw. Remove the needle.
e
With the flat side of the needle facing the back, insert
the new needle all the way to the top of the needle
stopper (viewing window) in the needle clamp. Use the
disc-shaped screwdriver to securely tighten the needle
clamp screw.
1 Needle stopper
2 Hole for inserting the needle
3 Flat side of the needle
f
Attach the presser foot. (page 45)
g
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
CAUTION
• Be sure to push in the needle until it touches
the stopper, and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with the disc-shaped screwdriver.
If the needle is not completely inserted or the
needle clamp screw is loose, the needle may
break and cause injury.
Memo
• The automatic threading function can be used with
home sewing machine needle sizes 75/11 through
100/16.
• When threads such as transparent nylon
monofilament or specialty threads are used, it is
not recommended to use the needle threader.
a
b
c
FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE COMBINATIONS
44
• Needles that can be used with this machine: Home sewing machine needles (size 65/9 - 100/16)
* The larger the number, the larger the needle. As the numbers decrease, the needles get finer.
• Thread that can be used with this machine: 30 - 90 weight
* Never use thread of 20 weight or lower. It may cause machine to malfunction.
* The smaller the number, the heavier the thread. As the numbers increase, the thread gets finer.
• The machine needle and thread that should be used depends on the type and thickness of the fabric. Refer to
the following table when choosing the thread and needle appropriate for the fabric that you wish to sew.
- The combinations shown in the table provide a general guideline. Be sure to sew trial stitches on the actual number of
layers and type of fabric to be used in your project.
- The machine needles are consumables. For safety and best results, we recommend replacing the needle regularly. For
details on when to replace the needle, refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 42.
• In principle, use a fine needle and thread with lightweight fabrics, and a larger needle and heavier thread with
heavyweight fabrics.
• Select a stitch appropriate for the fabric, and then adjust the stitch length. When sewing lightweight fabrics,
make the stitch length finer (shorter). When sewing heavyweight fabrics, make the stitch length coarser
(longer). (page 58)
When sewing stretch fabrics, refer to “Sewing Stretch Fabrics” on page 66.
Transparent Nylon Thread
Use a home sewing machine topstitching needle, regardless of the fabric or thread.
Sewing Character Stitch Patterns and Decorative Stitch Patterns (Needles and Threads)
When sewing lightweight, medium weight or stretch fabrics, use a ball point needle (gold colored) 90/14. When sewing
heavyweight fabrics, use a home sewing machine needle 90/14.
In addition, #50 to #60 thread should be used.
Embroidery Needles
Use a 75/11 home sewing machine needle for embroidery. When embroidering patterns with short stitches, such as small
letters, we recommend using a ball point needle for embroidery.
FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE COMBINATIONS
Fabric Type/Application
Thread
Size of needle
Stitch length
mm (inch)
Type Weight
Lightweight
fabrics
Lawn, georgette, challis, organdy,
crepe, chiffon, voile, gauze, tulle,
lining, etc.
Polyester thread 60 - 90
65/9 - 75/11
Fine stitches
1.8-2.5
(approx. 1/16-3/32)
Cotton thread
Silk thread
50 - 80
Medium weight
fabrics
Broadcloth, taffeta, gabardine,
flannel, seersucker, double gauze,
linen, terry cloth, waffle weave,
sheeting, poplin, cotton twill, satin,
quilting cotton, etc.
Polyester thread 60 - 90
75/11 - 90/14
Regular stitches
2.0-3.0
(approx. 1/16-1/8)
Cotton thread
Silk thread
50 - 60
Heavyweight
fabrics
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
etc.
Polyester thread
Cotton thread
30 100/16
Coarse stitches
2.5-4.0
(approx. 3/32-3/16)
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
tweed, corduroy, velour, melton
wool, vinyl-coated fabric, etc.
Polyester thread 60
90/14 - 100/16
Cotton thread
Silk thread
30 - 50
Stretch fabrics
(knit fabrics, etc.)
Jersey, tricot, T-shirt fabric, fleece,
interlock, etc.
Polyester thread
Cotton thread
Silk thread
50
Ball point needle
75/11 - 90/14
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
For top-stitching
Polyester thread
Cotton thread
30 90/14 - 100/16
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
50 - 60 75/11 - 90/14
CAUTION
• The appropriate fabric, thread and needle combinations are shown in the preceding table. If the
combination of the fabric, thread and needle is not correct, particularly when sewing heavy fabrics (such
as denim) with thin needles (such as 65/9 to 75/11), the needle may break and cause injury. In addition,
the stitching may be uneven or puckered or there may be skipped stitches.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
GETTING READY
45
1
Replacing the Presser Foot
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Touch to lock all keys and buttons.
* If the message [OK to automatically lower the
presser foot?] appears on the LCD screen, touch
to continue.
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Press the black button on the presser foot holder and
remove the presser foot.
e
Place the new presser foot under the holder, aligning
the foot pin with the notch in the holder. Lower the
presser foot lever so that the presser foot pin snaps into
the notch in the holder.
f
Raise the presser foot lever to check that the presser
foot is securely attached.
g
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
Attaching the Presser Foot with the Included
Adapter
Some presser feet require using the included adapter and
small screw, for example, the free motion echo quilting foot
“E” and so on.
Attaching the Included Adapter and Small
Screw
a
Follow the steps in “Replacing the Presser Foot” on
page 45.
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder to remove
the presser foot holder.
c
Remove the screw of the presser foot completely from
the presser foot shaft.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
CAUTION
• Always touch on the screen to lock all
keys and buttons before changing the presser
foot. If is not touched and the “Start/
Stop” button or another button is pressed, the
machine will start and may cause injury.
• Always use the correct presser foot for the
selected stitch pattern. If the wrong presser
foot is used, the needle may strike the presser
foot and break, and may cause injury.
• Make sure that the presser foot is installed in
the correct direction, otherwise the needle
may strike the presser foot, breaking the
needle and causing injuries.
IMPORTANT
• Use presser feet made for this machine.
1 Black button
2 Presser foot holder
1 Notch
2 Pin
a
b
a
b
1 Presser foot holder
screw
2 Presser foot holder
a
b
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
46
d
Set the adapter on the presser foot bar, aligning the flat
side of the adapter opening with the flat side of the
presser bar. Align the screw holes in the adapter and
presser foot bar, and then securely tighten the screw
with the disc-shaped screwdriver.
e
Turn the included small screw 2 or 3 times with your
hand.
f
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
Using the Compact Dual Feed Foot
The compact dual feed foot enables you to have best fabric
control when sewing difficult fabrics that slip easily, such as
quilted fabrics or fabrics that tend to stick to the bottom of a
presser foot, such as vinyl, leather or synthetic leather.
Attaching the Compact Dual Feed Foot
a
Remove the presser foot. (page 45)
b
Loosen the screw of the presser foot holder to remove
the presser foot holder.
c
Position the compact dual feed foot to the presser foot
bar by aligning the notch of the compact dual feed foot
to the large screw.
Side view
d
Hold the compact dual feed foot in place with your
right hand, then using the disc-shaped screwdriver
securely tighten the large screw.
e
Plug the connector of the compact dual feed foot into
the jack on the back of your machine.
f
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and the
previous screen is displayed.
g
Place the fabric under the compact dual feed foot with
the needle at the starting point of the stitching.
Note
• When sewing with the compact dual feed foot, sew
at medium to low speeds.
Memo
• When selecting stitches to be used with the
compact dual feed foot, only the stitches that can
be used will be activated on the display.
• When sewing fabric that easily sticks together, a
more attractive finish can be achieved by basting
the beginning of sewing.
1 Presser foot holder
screw
2 Presser foot holder
a
b
CAUTION
• Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw. If the screw is loose, the needle may
strike the presser foot and possibly cause
injury.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
GETTING READY
47
1
h
Be sure that the feed position lever is pushed down and
the compact dual feed foot is ready to sew.
1 Feed position lever
Attaching/Detaching Toe
Attach the toe by aligning the pins with the notches and
snap it into place.
1 Pins
2 Notches
If you push down on the front and back part of the
compact dual feed foot, the toe of the compact dual feed
foot will snap off.
Adjusting the Amount of Fabric Feeding from
the Compact Dual Feed Foot
The dual feed mechanism pulls the top fabric according to
the set stitch length. With troublesome fabrics, fine tune
the set length, by changing [Dual Feed Feed Adjustment]
in the settings screen.
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The sewing settings screen appears.
c
Display [Dual Feed Feed Adjustment] in the sewing
settings screen.
d
Use or to increase or decrease the feeding of
the top fabric.
* Select [00] for sewing in most cases.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too little,
causing the fabric to be longer than the bottom
fabric, touch to increase the feed amount for the
top fabric.
* If the feed amount for the top fabric is too much,
causing the fabric to be shorter than the bottom
fabric, touch to decrease the feed amount for
the top fabric.
e
Touch to return to the original screen.
Note
• Do not operate the lever while sewing.
Memo
• When the feed position lever is up, dual feed
function is not effective. When the feed position
lever is down, the black roller belt on the compact
dual feed is engaged.
a
Note
• As a default, some keys mentioned in the following
procedures appear in light gray and are not
available. To enable the keys for specifying the
settings, attach the compact dual feed foot to the
machine. The keys are enabled after the compact
dual feed foot is detected.
CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT
48
SEWING
SEWING BASICS
49
2
Stitch Types
Utility Stitches
1 Straight/Overcasting
2 Decorative Stitches
3 Heirloom Stitches
4 Buttonholes/Bar tacks
5 Multi-directional
6 Sewing Quilting Stitches
7 Other Stitches
8 Stitch Tapering
Character/Decorative Stitches
1 Decorative stitch patterns
2 7mm decorative stitch patterns
You can set stitch length and width.
3 Satin stitch patterns
4 7mm satin stitch patterns
You can set stitch length and width.
5 Cross stitch
6 Utility decorative stitch patterns
7 Alphabet characters (gothic font)
8 Alphabet characters (handwriting font)
9 Alphabet characters (outline)
0 Cyrillic font
A MY CUSTOM STITCH (page 99)
You can design original stitches.
B Stitch patterns stored in MY CUSTOM STITCH
(page 101)
C Stitch patterns saved in the machine’s memory (page 97)
D Stitch patterns saved in USB media (page 97)
E Stitch patterns to be transferred via the wireless network
(page 97)
Basic Sewing
a
Turn the main power to ON and touch to display
the utility stitches, and press (Needle position
button) to raise the needle.
Chapter 2
SEWING BASICS
SEWING
CAUTION
• To avoid injury, pay special attention to the
needle while the machine is in operation. Keep
your hands away from moving parts while the
machine is in operation.
• Do not stretch or pull the fabric during
sewing. Doing so may lead to injury.
• Do not use bent or broken needles. Doing so
may lead to injury.
• Do not attempt to sew over basting pins or
other objects during sewing. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury.
IMPORTANT
• If stitches become bunched, lengthen the
stitch length setting before continuing sewing.
Otherwise, the needle may break and cause
injury.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note
• First, perform a trial sewing, using a piece of fabric
and thread that are the same as those used for
your project.
1
3
2
4
7
0
A
C
6
9
5
8
D
B
E
SEWING
50
b
Select the category you want.
c
Touch the key of the stitch you want to sew.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
• For details on the key functions, refer to “Key
Functions” on page 18.
• If necessary, change to the desired stitch width or
stitch length. (page 57)
The symbol of the correct presser foot will be
displayed in the upper left corner of the LCD screen.
d
Install the presser foot (page 45).
e
Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold the fabric
and thread in your left hand, and rotate the handwheel
counterclockwise or press (Needle position
button) to set the needle in the sewing start position.
f
Lower the presser foot.
* You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
g
Adjust the sewing speed with the speed control slide.
* You can use this slide to adjust sewing speed during
sewing.
h
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start sewing.
* Guide the fabric lightly by hand.
i
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop sewing.
j
Press (Thread cutter button) to trim the upper
and bobbin threads.
The needle will return to the up position
automatically.
CAUTION
• Always use the correct presser foot. If the
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
strike the presser foot and break, possibly
resulting in injury.
Refer to “STITCH SETTING CHART” on
page 197 for presser foot recommendations.
1 Slow
2 Fast
Memo
• When the foot controller is being used, you cannot
start sewing by pressing the “Start/Stop” button.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press (Thread cutter button) after
the threads have been cut. Doing so could
tangle the thread or damage the machine.
• Do not press (Thread cutter button) when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle,
possibly resulting in damage.
a
b
SEWING
SEWING BASICS
51
2
k
When the needle has stopped moving, raise the presser
foot and remove the fabric.
Using the Foot Controller
You can also use the foot controller to start and stop
sewing.
a
Turn off the machine.
b
Insert the foot controller plug into the foot controller
jack on the machine.
c
Turn on the machine.
d
Slowly depress the foot controller to start sewing.
e
Release the foot controller to stop the machine.
Using Advanced Multi-Function Foot
Controller (Included with Some Models)
With the advanced multi-function foot controller, various
sewing machine operations in addition to starting/stopping
sewing, such as thread cutting and reverse stitching, can be
specified to be performed.
a
Align the smaller end of the mounting plate with the
guide on the bottom of the side pedal, and then gently
fasten them together with the mounting screw.
Align the larger end of the mounting plate with the
guide on the bottom of the main foot controller, and
then gently fasten them together with the mounting
screw.
1 Guide on side pedal
2 Mounting plate
3 Guide on main foot controller
Note
• When cutting thread thicker than #30, nylon
monofilament thread, or other decorative threads,
use the thread cutter on the side of the machine.
Memo
• When the foot controller is connected, the “Start/
Stop” button cannot be used to start sewing.
• The foot controller cannot be used when
embroidering.
1 Foot controller jack
Memo
• The speed that is set using the sewing speed
controller will be the foot controller’s maximum
sewing speed.
a
WARNING
• The advanced multi-function foot controller
contains small parts. Keep the product out of
the reach of children to prevent accidental
ingestion of small parts.
Note
• (For U.S.A. only) Foot controller: Model X
This foot controller can be used on the machine
with product code 882-W73. The product code is
mentioned on the machine rating plate.
12
34
No. Part Name
1 Main foot controller
2 Side pedal
3 Mounting plate
4 Mounting screw × 2
Memo
• The side pedal can be mounted on either the left or
right side of the main foot controller.
• The main foot controller and side pedal can also be
used without installing the mounting plate.
ac
b
SEWING
52
b
Adjust the spacing between the main foot controller
and side pedal.
* Use the markings on the mounting plate as a
convenient guide to adjust the spacing.
c
Firmly tighten the mounting screws to secure the main
foot controller and side pedal.
d
Turn off the machine.
e
Insert the plug for the side pedal into the jack on the
main foot controller.
f
Insert the plug for the main foot controller into the foot
controller jack on the right side of the machine.
1 Main foot controller
2 Foot controller jack
g
Turn on the machine. And then touch and
display page 2 of the settings screen.
h
Select the functions to be performed by the multi-
function foot controller.
* If you set the “Reverse Stitch” function on the heel
switch, machine operates the same as pressing
(Reverse stitch button) on the machine.
* Reinforcement stitching may be applied depending
on the selected stitch pattern. For the details, refer to
“Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement Stitching” on
page 55.
Memo
• To readjust the spacing between the main foot
controller and side pedal, slightly loosen the
mounting screws, and then adjust the positions of
the main foot controller and side pedal.
Memo
• The length of the cord for the main foot controller
can be adjusted. (page 53)
a
b
Memo
• Before specifying the functions, connect the multi-
function foot controller to the machine. The
settings screen is activated the first time that the
machine detects the multi-function foot controller.
Controller Functions that can be specified
1 Main foot controller Start/Stop
2 Heel switch Select any of the following:
• [Thread Cutting]
• [Needle Position – Up/Down]
• [Single Stitch]
• [Reverse Stitch] (Reinforcement
Stitch) *
• [Presser Foot Up/Down]
• [No Setting]
3 Side pedal
Memo
• If you set [Reverse Stitch] on the side pedal, you
can create a darning stitch effect using zigzag
stitches. With both feet, keep pressing the main
foot controller, and repeat pressing and releasing
the side pedal to sew forward and reverse in turn.
Machine will reverse at the speed you press the
main foot controller.
a
b
c
3
2
SEWING
SEWING BASICS
53
2
i
Touch .
j
Sew trial stitches and confirm that the settings are as
desired.
Pressing down on the main foot controller increases the
sewing speed; releasing the pressure on the main foot
controller decreases the sewing speed.
Release the main foot controller or side pedal to stop
sewing.
Adjusting the Length of the Cord for the Main
Foot Controller
a
Unwind the cord for the main foot controller.
b
Guide the cord between the tabs.
c
Wind the cord until it is the desired length.
* The cord can be wound either clockwise or
counterclockwise.
d
Pass the cord between the tabs.
Combining Stitch Patterns
Stitch patterns from the following categories can be
combined.
Memo
• The speed that is set using the sewing speed
controller will be the main foot controller’s
maximum sewing speed.
• When the multi-function foot controller is
connected, the “Start/Stop” button cannot be used
to start sewing.
Note
• In order to avoid stepping on the cord with the
main foot controller, pass the cord between the
tabs.
Memo
• When storing the cord, pass it between the tabs,
and then insert the plug into the jack on the main
foot controller.
SEWING
54
Example:
a
Touch .
b
Select the following stitch pattern (8-35).
c
Touch so that it displays .
d
Touch .
The display returns to the stitch selection screen.
e
Select a font.
f
Enter characters.
• : Select a stitch pattern individually.
• : Delete the selected stitch pattern.
• : Enter a space.
g
If you want to sew the stitch pattern continuously,
touch .
The stitch pattern turns continuous.
Inserting Stitch Patterns
a
Touch or to select the stitch pattern at the
position where a new stitch pattern will be added.
b
Touch .
c
Select a new stitch pattern.
The new stitch pattern is added immediately after the
stitch pattern selected in step
a.
Memo
• When sewing is completed, trim any excess thread
between characters.
SEWING
SEWING BASICS
55
2
Sewing Reverse Stitches/Reinforcement
Stitches
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally necessary at the
beginning and end of sewing. You can use (Reverse stitch
button) to sew reverse/reinforcement stitches. When you keep
pressing (Reinforcement stitch button), the machine will
sew reinforcement stitch at that point 3 to 5 stitches, and then
stop. (page 10)
1 Reverse stitch
2 Reinforcement stitch
3 (Reverse stitch button)
4 (Reinforcement stitch button)
The operation performed when the button is pressed differs
depending on the selected stitch pattern. (Refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.)
Automatic Reverse/Reinforcement Stitching
After selecting a stitch motif, turn on the automatic
reinforcement stitching function before sewing, and the
machine will automatically sew reinforcement stitches (or
reverse stitches, depending on the stitch motif) at the
beginning and end of sewing.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Touch to set the automatic reinforcement
stitching function.
The key will display as .
c
Set the needle in the start position and press the “Start/
Stop” button to start sewing.
1 Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue sewing.
d
Press (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button).
1 Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
Memo
• When you press (Reinforcement stitch button)
while sewing character/decorative stitch pattern,
you can end sewing with a full stitch instead of at a
mid-point.
• The green light on the right of (Reinforcement
stitch button) lights up while the machine is sewing
a full motif, and it automatically turns off when the
sewing is stopped.
cd
a
b
Memo
• Pressing the “Start/Stop” button while the machine
is sewing pauses or restarts sewing.
a
a
SEWING
56
The operation performed when the button is pressed differs
depending on the selected stitch pattern. Refer to the
following table for details on the operation that is performed
when the button is pressed.
* If [Reinforcement Priority] of the settings screen is set to
[ON] (page 20), reinforcement stitches are sewn instead of
reverse stitches.
(Reverse stitch
button)
(Reinforcement
stitch button)
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches
while holding
(Reverse stitch
button).
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reinforcement
stitch button).
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches
while holding
(Reverse stitch
button).*
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reinforcement
stitch button).
with a stitch
other than reverse or
reinforcement stitch
pattern selected.
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reverse stitch
button).
Machine sews 3 – 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reinforcement
stitch button).
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches while
holding
(Reverse stitch
button).
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches after
completing the stitch
pattern, when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches and
stops sewing when
the (Reverse
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing, reverse
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
+
Machine sews
reverse stitches and
stops sewing when
(Reverse stitch
button) is pressed.*
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
with a stitch
other than reverse or
reinforcement stitch
pattern selected.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reverse stitch
button) is pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
+
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing when
(Reverse stitch
button) is pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches and stops
sewing after
completing the stitch
pattern, when
(Reinforcement
stitch button) is
pressed.
(At the beginning of
sewing,
reinforcement
stitches are sewn
automatically when
“Start/Stop” button
is pressed.)
(Reverse stitch
button)
(Reinforcement
stitch button)
STITCH SETTINGS
SEWING BASICS
57
2
Automatic Presser Foot Lowering Function
and Thread Cutting Function
By setting the machine to automatically raise and lower the
presser foot, sewing operations can be performed more
smoothly.
Setting the Stitch Width/Stitch Length/“L/R
Shift”
When you select a stitch, your machine automatically
selects the appropriate stitch width, stitch length, and L/R
Shift. However, if needed, you can change any of the
individual settings.
Setting the Stitch Width
Follow the steps below when you want to change the zigzag
stitch pattern width.
No. Key Name Explanation
1 [Auto Down] When [Auto Down] is set to [ON], pressing
the "Start/Stop"button or depressing the
foot controller automatically lowers the
presser foot (if it is raised) before starting to
sew.
2 [Auto Up] When [Auto Up] is set to [ON], the presser
foot is raised when stopping sewing.
The presser foot is raised to the height
specified for [Presser Foot Height]
(page 20).
When the pivot setting ( ) is selected,
the presser foot is raised to the height
specified for [Pivoting Height] (page 20).
3 [Press to Trim] When [Press to Trim] is set to [ON],
pressing (Thread cutter button)
automatically lowers the presser foot (if it is
raised) before cutting the thread. The
presser foot will be raised after the thread is
cut.
1
2
3
STITCH SETTINGS
Memo
• Settings for some stitches cannot be changed
(page 197).
• If you turn off the machine or select another stitch
without saving stitch setting changes (page 59), the
stitch settings will return to their default settings.
• Touch to save the stitch settings.
• Touch to check changes made to the stitch.
• Touch to return the original setting.
Note
• After adjusting the stitch width or the “L/R Shift”,
slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the needle does
not touch the presser foot.
IMPORTANT
• If the stitches get bunched together, lengthen
the stitch length and continue sewing. Do not
continue sewing without lengthening the stitch
length. Otherwise, the needle may bend or
break.
Memo
• For an alternate method of changing the stitch
width using the speed controller, refer to page 75.
STITCH SETTINGS
58
Setting the Stitch Length
Follow the steps below when you want to change the stitch
pattern length.
Setting the “L/R Shift”
Follow the steps below when you want to change the
placement of the zigzag stitch pattern by moving it left and
right.
Setting the Thread Tension
You may need to change the thread tension, depending on the
fabric and thread being used. Follow the steps below to make
any necessary changes.
Proper Thread Tension
The upper thread and the bobbin thread should cross near
the center of the fabric. Only the upper thread should be
visible from the right side of the fabric, and only the
bobbin thread should be visible from the wrong side of the
fabric.
Upper Thread is Too Tight
If the bobbin thread is visible from the right side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
Touch , to loosen the upper thread.
Upper Thread is Too Loose
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
Touch , to tighten the upper thread.
Memo
• Touch to return the thread tension to the
original setting.
1 Wrong side
2 Surface
3 Upper thread
4 Bobbin thread
Memo
• Many decorative stitches and satin stitches are
designed so that the upper thread wraps to the
back slightly for a more attractive finish.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too tight. In this case, refer to
“Setting the Bobbin” on page 34 and rethread the
bobbin thread.
1 Bobbin thread
2 Upper thread
3 Surface
4 Locks appear on
surface of fabric
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too loose. In this case, refer
to “Upper Threading” on page 36 and rethread the
upper thread.
1 Upper thread
2 Bobbin thread
3 Wrong side
4 Locks appear on wrong
side of fabric
STITCH SETTINGS
SEWING BASICS
59
2
Saving Your Stitch Settings
The settings for the zigzag stitch width, stitch length, thread
tension, etc., are preset in the machine for each stitch.
However, if you have specific settings that you wish to reuse
later for a stitch, you can change the settings so that they can
be saved for that stitch. Five sets of settings can be saved for a
single stitch.
Saving Settings
a
Select a stitch.
b
Specify your preferred settings.
c
Touch .
The settings are saved and the original screen
automatically appears.
Retrieving Saved Settings
a
Select a stitch.
b
Touch .
c
Touch the numbered key of the settings to be retrieved.
* Touch to return to the original screen without
retrieving settings.
1 Numbered keys
d
Touch .
The selected settings are retrieved, and the original
screen automatically appears.
Returning the Selected Stitch Pattern Saved
Settings to the Default Settings
a
Touch .
b
Touch .
Memo
• If you try to save settings when there are already 5
sets of settings saved for a stitch, delete a setting
referring to “Retrieving Saved Settings” on
page 59.
1
Memo
• To save new settings when there are already 5 sets
of settings saved for a stitch, touch . Touch
the numbered key of the setting to be deleted.
Touch , touch and then . The
new setting will be saved in place of the recently
deleted setting.
• You can delete all the saved settings by touching
.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
60
Automatic Thread Cutting
After selecting a stitch pattern, turn on the automatic thread
cutting function before sewing, and the machine will
automatically sew reinforcement stitches (or reverse stitches,
depending on the stitch pattern) at the beginning and end of
sewing, and trim the threads at the end of sewing. This
function is useful when sewing buttonholes and bar tacks.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Touch to set the automatic thread cutting
function.
The keys will display as
, and the machine
is set for automatic thread cutting function and
automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching.
c
Set the needle into the fabric and start sewing.
The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue sewing.
d
Once you have reached the end of the stitching, press
(Reverse stitch button) or (Reinforcement
stitch button) once.
If stitching, such as buttonholes and bar tacking, that
includes reinforcement stitching has been selected, this
operation is unnecessary.
After the reverse stitching (or reinforcement stitching)
has been done, the machine stops, and the threads
are cut.
Adjusting the Needle Drop Point with the
Guideline Marker
The red guideline marker indicates the sewing position on the
fabric. You can adjust the sewing position by moving the
guideline marker while checking the guideline marker on the
fabric.
a
Touch to display the guideline marker.
The guideline marker scale appears.
* Depending on the setting of [Initial Position] in the
settings screen, the initial needle drop point is
scaled as either 0.0 mm or 3.5 mm.
b
Use or to move the needle drop point.
Adjust the position from 15.5 mm (approx. 5/8 inch)
to the right of the left needle to -3.5 mm (approx. -1/8
inch) to the left of the left needle.
1 Touch to flip the guideline marker position on the center
needle position.
c
Touch again to stop using the guideline marker.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Memo
• To turn off the automatic thread cutting function,
touch again, so it appears as .
1 The point where the
“Start/Stop” button was
pressed.
2 The point where
(Reverse stitch button)
or (Reinforcement
stitch button) was
pressed.
3 The thread is cut here.
32
1
WARNING
• The guideline marker is a laser; therefore, do
not stare at the laser light directly. Otherwise
it may cause blindness.
1
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
SEWING BASICS
61
2
Adjusting the Guideline Marker Position
If the guideline marker indicates the position incorrectly in
the center needle position, adjust the initial position in the
settings screen.
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The sewing settings screen appears.
c
Display [Guideline Marker Adjustment] in the sewing
settings screen.
d
Touch .
e
Use or to adjust the guideline marker position.
* : Move the guideline marker to the left.
: Move the guideline marker to the right.
f
Touch twice to return to the original screen.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Guideline
Marker
a
Follow steps from a to d to display the [Guideline
Marker Adjustment] screen.
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of the guideline
marker.
Set the brightness of the guideline marker from [1] for
a dim marker, to [5] for the brightest marker, on the
fabric.
c
Touch twice to return to the original screen.
Pivoting
If the pivot function is selected, the machine stops with the
needle lowered (in the fabric) and the presser foot is
automatically raised to an appropriate height when the “Start/
Stop” button is pressed. When the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed again, the presser foot is automatically lowered and
sewing continues. This function is useful for stopping the
machine to rotate the fabric.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Touch to select the pivot setting.
The key appears as .
CAUTION
• When the pivot setting is selected, the
machine starts when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed or the foot controller is pressed down
even if the presser foot has been raised. Be
sure to keep your hands and other items away
from the needle, otherwise injuries may occur.
Memo
• When the pivot setting is selected, the height of the
presser foot when sewing is stopped can be
changed according to the type of fabric being
sewn. Touch to display [Pivoting Height] of
the settings screen. Touch or to select the
height. To raise the presser foot further, increase
the setting.
Memo
• If appears as light gray when the stitch pattern
was selected, the pivot function cannot be used.
• If the pivot function is selected, and
beside [Presser Foot Height] in the settings screen
are not available and the setting cannot be
changed.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
62
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot with the needle
at the starting point of the stitching, and then press the
“Start/Stop” button. The machine will begin sewing.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the machine at
the point where the sewing direction changes.
The machine stops with the needle in the fabric, and
the presser foot is raised.
e
Rotate the fabric, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button.
The presser foot is automatically lowered, and
sewing continues.
Using the Knee Lifter
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the presser foot
with your knee, leaving both hands free to handle the fabric.
a
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the notches in the
knee lifter slot on the front of the machine. Insert the
knee lifter bar as far as possible.
b
Use your knee to move the knee lifter bar to the right
in order to raise the presser foot. Slowly return the
knee lifter bar to the left to lower the presser foot.
Automatic Fabric Sensor System (Automatic
Presser Foot Pressure)
The thickness of the fabric is automatically detected and the
presser foot pressure is automatically adjusted with an internal
sensor while sewing, to insure that your fabric is fed smoothly.
The fabric sensor system works continuously while sewing.
This function is useful for sewing heavyweight fabrics
(page 65), or quilting (page 74).
Touch , and then set [Automatic Fabric Sensor System]
to [ON]. (page 20)
Needle Position - Stitch Placement
When the [Needle Position - Stitch Placement] is [ON], the
needle will be partially lowered for precise stitch placement
and then completely lowered when you press (Needle
Position button). Each press of (Needle Position button)
changes the needle to the next position. When the [Needle
Position - Stitch Placement] is [OFF], each press of
(Needle Position button) simply raises and then lowers the
needle.
Touch , and then set [Needle Position - Stitch
Placement] to [ON] or [OFF]. (page 21)
[Needle Position - Stitch Placement] is [ON]
* When the needle is nearly lowered by pressing
(Needle position button), the feed dogs are lowered.
At this time, the fabric can be shifted to finely adjust
the needle drop point.
Memo
• If the knee lifter bar is not pushed into the mounting
slot as far as possible, it may come out during use.
Note
• Be sure to keep your knee away from the knee lifter
during sewing.
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
SEWING BASICS
63
2
[Needle Position - Stitch Placement] is [OFF]
Using the Straight Stitch Needle Plate and
the Straight Stitch Foot
The straight stitch needle plate and the straight stitch foot can
only be used for straight stitches (middle needle position
stitches). Use the straight stitch needle plate and the straight
stitch foot when sewing thin fabrics or when sewing small
pieces which tend to sink into the hole of the regular needle
plate during sewing. The straight stitch foot is perfect to
reduce puckering on lightweight fabrics. The small opening
on the foot provides support for the fabric as the needle travels
through the fabric.
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle,
raise the presser foot and turn the main power to OFF.
And then unplug the machine.
b
Remove the needle and the presser foot. (page 42,
page 45)
c
Insert the multi-purpose screwdriver into the hole, and
tilt the multi-purpose screwdriver to the left and then
to the back, as shown in the illustration.
d
Slide out the regular needle plate with your right hand
to remove it.
e
Insert the tabs on the straight stitch needle plate into
the notches in the machine.
1 Tabs
2 Notches
f
Press down on the right side of the straight stitch
needle plate to secure it.
1 2.25 mm (1/8 inch)
2 4.25 mm (3/16 inch)
3 6.25 mm (1/4 inch)
4 8.5 mm (5/16 inch)
CAUTION
• Always use the straight stitch foot in
combination with the straight stitch needle
plate. Otherwise, the needle may break and
cause injury.
a
b
USEFUL SEWING TIPS
64
g
Insert needle and attach the straight stitch foot.
h
Select any of the straight stitches.
i
Start sewing.
* After sewing, make sure to turn off the machine and
to remove the straight stitch needle plate and the
straight stitch foot. Reinstall the regular needle plate
and the presser foot “J”.
Sewing Tips
Trial Sewing
Before starting your sewing project, we recommend
sewing trial stitches using thread and scrap fabric that are
the same as those used for your project.
While checking the sewing results, adjust the thread
tension as well as the stitch length and width according to
the number of fabric layers and stitch that is sewn.
Sewing Curves
Sew slowly while keeping the seam parallel with the
fabric edge as you guide the fabric around the curve.
Shorten the stitch length setting to obtain a fine stitch. Sew
slowly, keeping the seams parallel with the fabric edge as
you guide the fabric around the curve.
Changing Sewing Direction
Stop the machine. Leave the needle in the fabric, and
press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the presser
foot. Using the needle as a pivot, turn the fabric so that
you can sew in the new direction. Press (Presser foot
lifter button) to lower the presser foot and start sewing.
The pivot setting is useful when changing the sewing
direction. (page 61)
1 Notch
2 Pin
Memo
• Selecting unavailable stitches will cause an error
message to be displayed.
• When the straight stitch needle plate is on the
machine, the needle will automatically move to the
middle position.
Note
• Slowly rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) before sewing and make sure
that the needle is not contacting the straight stitch
foot and straight stitch needle plate.
USEFUL SEWING TIPS
Note
• Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer
material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch, so
you should always sew a few trial stitches before
beginning your project.
• When sewing satin stitch or 7 mm satin stitch
patterns, there may be shrinking or bunching of
stitches, so be sure to use a stabilizer material.
USEFUL SEWING TIPS
SEWING BASICS
65
2
Sewing Various Fabrics
Sewing Heavyweight Fabrics
If the thickness of a seam causes the presser foot to rest at
an angle, help guide the fabric by hand and sew on the
downward slope.
If the Fabric does not Fit under the Presser Foot
If the presser foot is in the up position, and you are sewing
heavyweight or multiple layers of fabric which do not fit
easily under the presser foot, use the presser foot lever to
raise the presser foot to its highest position. The fabric will
now fit under the presser foot.
If the Fabric does not Feed
When sewing thick fabric such as denim or quilting layers,
the fabric may not feed at the start of sewing if the presser
foot is not level, as shown below. In this case, use the
presser foot locking pin (black button on the left side) of
zigzag foot “J” so that the presser foot remains level while
sewing, allowing the fabric to be fed smoothly.
If the presser foot misalignment is too large, place thick
paper or fabric (with the same thickness as the fabric being
sewn) under the heel of the presser foot to be able to start
sewing smoothly.
1 Sewing direction
2 Misalignment
3 Fabric being sewn
4 Fabric or thick paper
a
Raise the presser foot.
b
While keeping the black button on the left side of
presser foot “J” pressed in, press (Presser foot
lifter button) to lower the presser foot.
c
Release the presser foot locking pin.
The presser foot remains level, enabling the fabric to
be fed.
CAUTION
• If fabric more than 6 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
thick is sewn or if the fabric is pushed with too
much force, the needle may break and cause
injury.
Memo
• Thicker fabrics require a larger needle. (page 44)
Memo
• You cannot use the presser foot lever after the
presser foot has been raised using (Presser
foot lifter button).
Memo
• Once the trouble spot has been passed, the foot
will return to its normal position.
• When [Automatic Fabric Sensor System]
(Automatic Presser Foot Pressure) in the machine
settings screen is set to [ON], the thickness of the
fabric is automatically detected by the internal
sensor so the fabric can be fed smoothly for best
sewing results (page 62).
b
a
d
c
USEFUL SEWING TIPS
66
Sewing Lightweight Fabrics
Place thin paper or tear away embroidery stabilizer under
thin fabrics to make sewing easier. Gently tear off the
paper or the stabilizer after sewing.
Sewing Stretch Fabrics
First, baste together the pieces of fabric, and then sew
without stretching the fabric.
In addition, a better result can be achieved by using thread
for knits or a stretch stitch.
Sewing Leathers or Vinyl Fabrics
When sewing fabrics that may stick to the presser foot, such as
leather or vinyl fabrics, replace the presser foot with the
compact dual feed foot.
If the leather or vinyl fabric sticks to the flat bed attachment,
sew with copy paper or tracing paper placed on top of the flat
bed attachment so the fabric moves smoothly.
If the paper is positioned so that it does not cover the needle
plate, the paper will not be sewn together with the fabric.
Sewing Decorative Stitch Patterns
1 Thin paper
Memo
• For best results when sewing stretch fabrics,
decrease the pressure of the presser foot
(page 20).
1 Basting stitching
1 Leather
1 Copy paper or
tracing paper
a
a
a
a
Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach
stabilizer on the wrong side of the fabric. An
alternative would be to place the fabric on thin
paper such as tracing paper.
1 Fabric
2 Stabilizer
3 Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the
Ball point needle (golden colored) 90/14
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine
needle 90/14
Presser foot Advanced monogramming foot “N+”.
Using another presser foot may give inferior
results.
a
b
c
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
67
3
Straight Stitches
1 Left needle position
2 Middle needle position
Changing the Needle Position (Left or Middle
Needle Position Stitches Only)
When you select left or middle needle position stitches,
you can use and in the L/R Shift display to
change the position of the needle. Match the distance
from the right edge of the presser foot to the needle with
the L/R Shift, then align the edge of the presser foot with
the edge of the fabric during sewing for an attractive
finish.
Example: Left/Middle needle position stitches
Chapter 3
VARIOUS STITCHES
UTILITY STITCHES
CAUTION
• Before replacing the presser foot, be sure to
touch to lock all keys and buttons,
otherwise injuries may occur if the “Start/
Stop” button or any other button is pressed
and the machine starts. For details on changing
the presser foot, refer to “Replacing the Presser
Foot” on page 45.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
1 L/R Shift
a
12.0 mm
(approx. 1/
2 inch)
8.5 mm
(approx. 5/
16 inch)
6.5 mm
(approx. 1/
4 inch)
5.0 mm
(approx. 3/
16 inch)
Memo
• Stitch Q-01 will not permit using the L/R Shift
function.
• When [Width Control] in the Sewing settings screen
is set to [ON], the needle position of a straight
stitch can be changed with the sewing speed
controller.
And use the foot controller to operate the machine.
1 Shift the needle position to the left.
2 Shift the needle position to the right.
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
68
Aligning the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle
Plate or Bobbin Cover (with Mark)
While sewing, align the edge of the fabric with the 5/8
inch (approx. 1.6 cm) mark on the needle plate or bobbin
cover (with mark) depending on the needle position (left
or middle (center) needle position stitches only).
For stitches with a left needle position
(Stitch width: 0.0 mm)
1 Seam
2 Presser foot
3 Centimeters
4 Inches
5 Needle plate
6 5/8 inch (approx. 1.6 cm)
For stitches with a middle (center) needle position
(Stitch width: 3.5 mm)
1 Seam
2 Presser foot
3 Inches
4 Bobbin cover (with mark)
5 5/8 inch (approx. 1.6 cm)
Basting
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Keep pressing (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button) to sew 4 stitches of
reinforcement stitches, then press “Start/Stop” button
to continue sewing.
c
When sewing is finished, sew reinforcement stitches,
and then cut the threads to a generous length.
Memo
• Before sewing, pull up the bobbin thread, align it
with the upper thread, and then pull them to the
back of the machine. (page 35) For clean stitching,
hold these thread ends when starting to sew.
• You can set the stitch length between 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm (approx. 1-3/16
inches).
1 Between 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and 30 mm
(approx.1-3/16 inches)
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
69
3
Dart Seam
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew a reverse stitch at the beginning of the dart and
then sew from the wide end to the other end without
stretching the fabric.
1 Basting
c
Cut the thread at the end leaving 5 cm (approx. 2
inches), and then tie both ends together.
* Do not sew a reverse stitch at the end.
d
Insert the ends of the thread into the dart with a hand
sewing needle.
e
Iron the dart to one side so that it is flat.
Gathering
Use on waists of skirts, sleeves of shirts, etc.
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and
the thread tension to approximately 2.0 (weaker
tension).
c
Pull the bobbin and upper threads out by about 10 cm
(approx. 4 inches) (page 35).
1 Upper thread
2 Bobbin thread
3 About 10 cm (approx. 4 inches)
d
Sew two rows of straight stitches parallel to the seam
line, then trim excess thread leaving about 5 cm
(approx. 2 inches).
1 Seam line
2 1 cm to 1.5 cm (approx. 3/8 inch to 9/16 inch)
3 About 5 cm (approx. 2 inches)
e
Pull the bobbin threads to obtain the desired amount of
gather, then tie the threads.
UTILITY STITCHES
70
f
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
g
Sew on the seam line and remove the basting stitch.
Flat Fell Seam
Use for reinforcing seams and finishing edges neatly.
a
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Sew the seam line, then cut half of the seam allowance
from the side on which the flat fell seam will lie.
* When the automatic thread cutting and automatic
reinforcement stitching are preset, reverse stitches
will be sewn automatically at the beginning of
sewing. Press (Reinforcement stitch button) to
sew a reinforcement stitch and trim the thread
automatically at the end of sewing.
1 About 1.2 cm (approx. 1/2 inch)
2 Wrong side
c
Spread the fabric out along the seam.
1 Seam
2 Wrong side
d
Lay both seam allowances on the side of the shorter
seam (cut seam) and iron them.
1 Wrong side
e
Fold the longer seam allowance around the shorter
one, and sew the edge of the fold.
1 Wrong side
Finished flat fell seam
1 Surface
Pintuck
a
Mark along the folds on the wrong side of the fabric.
1 Wrong side
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
71
3
b
Turn the fabric and iron the folded parts only.
1 Surface
c
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
d
Sew a straight stitch along the fold.
1 Width for pintuck
2 Wrong side
3 Surface
e
Iron the folds in the same direction.
Zigzag Stitches
Cord Guide Bobbin Cover (Using a Zigzag
Stitch)
a
Remove the bobbin cover from the machine (page 34).
b
Thread the gimp thread through the hole in the cord
guide bobbin cover from bottom to top. Position the
thread in the notch at the back of the cord guide
bobbin cover.
c
Snap the cord guide bobbin cover into place, making
sure that the gimp thread can be fed freely.
* Make sure there are no restrictions when feeding the
thread.
d
Set the zigzag width from 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 -
3/32 inch).
e
Attach advanced monogramming foot “N+”.
f
Position the fabric right side up on top of the cord and
place the cord to the rear of the machine under the
presser foot.
1 Fabric (right side)
2 Gimp thread
1 Notch
2 Gimp thread
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
72
g
Lower the presser foot and start sewing to make a
decorative finish.
Overcasting
Sew overcasting stitches along the edges of cut fabric to
prevent them from fraying.
Using Overcasting Foot “G”
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach overcasting foot “G”.
c
Position the fabric with the edge of the fabric against
the guide of the presser foot, and then lower the
presser foot lever.
d
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the presser foot.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
CAUTION
• When using overcasting foot “G”, be sure
select a stitch that can be used with
overcasting foot “G”. If you sew with the
incorrect stitch, the needle may strike the
presser foot and break, and may cause injury.
1 Guide
1 The needle should
not touch the
center bar
G
a
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
73
3
e
Sew with the edge of the fabric against the presser foot
guide.
f
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing when you
have reached the end of the stitching, and raise the
presser foot and needle to pull the fabric under the
presser foot towards the back of the machine.
Using Zigzag Foot “J”
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Sew along the edge of the fabric with the needle
dropping off the edge at the right.
Quilting
You can make beautiful quilts quickly and easily with this
machine. When making a quilt, you will find it convenient to
use the knee lifter and foot controller to free your hands for
other tasks (“Using the Foot Controller” on page 51, “Using
Advanced Multi-Function Foot Controller (Included with
Some Models)” on page 51 and /or “Using the Knee Lifter” on
page 62)
The 40 quilting stitches Q-01 through Q-40, stitches S-02
through S-04 and the utility stitches with “P” or “Q” indicated
on their key are useful for quilting.
The “P” or “Q” at the bottom of the key display indicates that
these stitches are intended for (“Q”) quilting and (“P”) piecing.
Piecing
Sewing two pieces of fabric together is called piecing.
When cutting pieces for quilt blocks, make sure the seam
allowance is 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch).
a
Select a stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
1 Needle drop point
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to pull the fabric backward after
finished sewing. If you pull the fabric toward
side or forward, the presser foot pin may be
damaged.
• If thread is tangled on the presser foot, remove
the entangled thread, and then raise the
presser foot lever to remove the presser foot. If
the presser foot is raised while entangled with
thread, the presser foot may be damaged.
1 Needle drop point
Note
• Fine adjustment of the stitching on the fabric can
be done with “L/R Shift”. Before sewing your
project, be sure to sew trial stitches using the same
conditions as in the actual project.
1
a
Memo
• When a stitch pattern in the quilting stitches
category (only quilting stitches marked with “Q”) is
selected, a finer stitch width can be set than that
available with stitch patterns in other categories.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
UTILITY STITCHES
74
b
Align the edge of the fabric with the edge of the presser
foot, and start sewing.
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam
allowance along the right edge of the presser foot
with
(Q-02) selected, the width (which is the
needle position) should be set to 5.50 mm (approx.
7/32 inch).
* To sew a 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4 inch) seam allowance
along the left edge of the presser foot with
selected, the width should be set to 1.50 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch).
* To change the needle position, use or in
the L/R Shift display.
Piecing Using the 1/4 Piecing Foot with Guide
This piecing foot can sew an accurate 1/4 inch or 1/8 inch
seam allowance.
It can be used for piecing together a quilt or for
topstitching.
a
Select , and then attach the 1/4 piecing foot with
guide.
b
Use the guide and marks on the presser foot to sew
accurate seam allowances.
Piecing a 1/4 inch seam allowance
Sew keeping the edge of the fabrics against the guide.
Creating an accurate seam allowance
Use the mark on the foot to begin, end, or pivot 1/4 inch
from edge of fabric.
Topstitching quilting, 1/8 inch
Sew with the edge of the fabric aligned with the left side of
the presser foot's front section.
Quilting
Sewing the quilt top, batting, and backing together is
called quilting. You can sew the quilt with the compact
dual feed foot to keep the quilt top, batting, and backing
from sliding. The compact dual feed foot has a motorized
belt that moves together with the feed dogs in the needle
plate during sewing.
For straight line quilting, use the compact dual feed foot
and the straight stitch needle plate. Always select a
straight stitch (middle needle position) when using the
straight stitch needle plate.
1 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4
inch)
1 6.5 mm (approx. 1/4
inch)
Memo
• In the case Q-01(center, at L/R Shift 3.5 mm) is
selected, if the guideline marker is set at 10.0 mm
(3.5 mm plus 6.5 mm, close to 1/4 inch), you can
sew piecing by referring to the guideline marker.
1 Guide
a
a
a
1 Guide
2 1/4 inch
Memo
• For accurate fabric placement, refer to “Aligning
the Fabric with a Mark on the Needle Plate or
Bobbin Cover (with Mark)” on page 68.
1 Align this mark with
edge of fabric to begin.
2 Beginning of stitching
3 End of stitching
4 Opposite edge of fabric
to end or pivot
5 1/4 inch
Memo
• For details on pivoting, refer to “Pivoting” on
page 61.
1 Surface of fabric
2 Seam
3 1/8 inch
a
b
a
e
e
c
d
b
a
b
c
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
75
3
a
Select a stitch.
b
Attach the compact dual feed foot (page 46).
c
Place one hand on each side of the presser foot to hold
the fabric secure while sewing.
Appliqué
a
Use two-sided stabilizer material to secure the
appliqué piece to the base fabric.
b
Select .
c
Attach the zigzag foot “J”.
d
Turn the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise),
and then begin sewing around the edge of the
appliqué, making sure that the needle drops just
outside of the appliqué.
When sewing around corners, stop the machine with
the needle in the fabric just outside of the appliqué,
raise the presser foot lever, and then turn the fabric as
needed to change the sewing direction.
Quilting with Satin Stitches
For better fabric control, use the foot controller to sew
with satin stitches. Set the speed control slide to control
the stitch width to make subtle changes in the stitch width
during sewing.
a
Attach the foot controller (page 51).
b
Select and attach presser foot “J”.
c
Touch in the length display to shorten the stitch
length.
d
Touch to use the speed control slide to control
the stitch width.
e
Set the [Width Control] to [ON].
f
Touch .
The display will return to the original screen.
g
While sewing, slide the sewing speed controller to
adjust the stitch width.
* Adjust the sewing speed with the foot controller.
h
When you are finished sewing, set the [Width Control]
back to [OFF].
Memo
• Sew at slow to medium speed.
• Always check to be sure that your quilting project is
securely basted before beginning to sew.
Memo
• The setting will vary according to the kind of fabric
and the thickness of the thread, but a length of 0.3
to 0.5 mm (approx. 1/64 to 1/32 inch) is best for
satin stitches.
1 narrower
2 wider
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
76
Free Motion Quilting
With free motion quilting, the feed dogs can be lowered
by touching , so that the fabric can be moved freely in
any direction.
For free motion quilting, use free motion quilting foot “C”
or free motion open toe quilting foot “O” depending on
the stitch that is selected, and set the machine to free
motion sewing mode. In this mode, the presser foot is
raised to the necessary height for free motion sewing.
We recommend attaching the foot controller and sewing
at a consistent speed. You can adjust the sewing speed
with the speed control slide on the machine.
Using free motion quilting foot “C” (Included with some
models)
Use the free motion quilting foot “C” with straight stitch
needle plate for free motion sewing.
Free motion quilting foot “C”
a
Attach the straight stitch needle plate (page 63).
b
Select a stitch.
c
Touch to set the machine to free motion sewing
mode.
The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
1 Free motion quilting foot “C”
When stitch Q-01 or 1-31 is selected, free motion
quilting foot “C” is indicated in the upper-left corner
of the screen.
d
Remove the presser foot holder (page 45).
e
Attach free motion quilting foot “C” at the front with
the presser foot holder screw aligned with the notch in
the foot.
CAUTION
• With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break and cause injury.
Memo
• When starting to sew, the internal sensor detects
the thickness of the fabric, and the quilting foot is
raised to the height specified in the machine
settings screen. Touch to display [Free
Motion Foot Height] of the settings screen. Touch
or to select the height that the quilting foot
is raised above the fabric.
• In order to sew with a balanced tension, it may be
necessary to adjust the upper thread tension. Test
with a sample piece of fabric that is similar to your
chosen fabric.
• Do not be discouraged with your initial results. The
technique requires practice.
CAUTION
• When using free motion quilting foot “C”, be
sure to use the straight stitch needle plate. If the
needle is moved to any position other than the
middle (center) needle position, the needle may
break, which may result in injuries.
C
1 Round hole
CAUTION
• The machine must be turned off and unplugged
when switching the needle plate.
1 Presser foot holder
screw
2 Notch
Note
• Make sure that the free motion quilting foot “C” is
attached properly and not slanted.
1
1
b
a
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
77
3
f
Hold the free motion quilting foot “C” in place with
your right hand, and tighten the presser foot holder
screw using the disc-shaped screwdriver with your left
hand.
g
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut, and then
move the fabric at a consistent pace in order to sew
uniform stitches roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/
32 inch) in length.
h
Touch to cancel the free motion sewing mode.
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
i
After sewing, make sure to remove the straight stitch
needle plate and free motion quilting foot “C”, and
reinstall the regular needle plate.
Using free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is used for free
motion quilting with zigzag or decorative stitches or for
free motion quilting of straight lines on fabric with an
uneven thickness. Various stitches can be sewn using free
motion open toe quilting foot “O”. For details on the
stitches that can be used, refer to “STITCH SETTING
CHART” on page 197.
Free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
a
Touch to set the machine to free motion sewing
mode.
The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, and then the feed dogs are
lowered for free motion sewing.
b
Select a stitch.
c
Remove the presser foot holder (page 45).
d
Attach free motion open toe quilting foot “O” by
positioning the pin of the foot above the needle clamp
screw and aligning the lower-left of the foot and the
presser bar.
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
disc-shaped screwdriver. Otherwise, the
needle may touch the free motion quilting foot
“C”, causing it to break and causing injury.
1 Stitch
Note
• Free motion open toe quilting foot “O” can also be
used with the straight stitch needle plate. We
recommend using free motion open toe quilting
foot “O” with free motion sewing of fabrics of
uneven thicknesses.
Memo
• The standard needle plate must be used if zigzag
or decorative stitch patterns are selected.
Memo
• When stitch Q-01 or 1-31 is selected, free motion
quilting foot “C” is indicated in the upper-left
corner of the screen. When the other stitches are
selected, free motion open toe quilting foot “O” is
indicated in the screen.
1 Pin
2 Needle clamp screw
3 Presser bar
Note
• Make sure that the free motion open toe quilting
foot “O” is not slanted.
O
O
UTILITY STITCHES
78
e
Hold the free motion open toe quilting foot “O” in
place with your right hand, and tighten the presser foot
holder screw using the disc-shaped screwdriver with
your left hand.
f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut, and then
move the fabric at a consistent pace in order to sew
uniform stitches roughly 2.0-2.5 mm (approx. 1/16 - 3/
32 inch) in length.
g
Touch to cancel the free motion sewing mode.
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
Echo Quilting Using the Free Motion Echo
Quilting Foot “E” (Included with Some
Models)
Sewing quilting lines at equal distances around a motif is
called echo quilting. The quilting lines, which appear as
ripples echoing away from the motif, are the
distinguishing characteristic of this quilting style. Use the
free motion echo quilting foot “E” for echo quilting. Using
the measurement on the presser foot as a guide, sew
around the motif at a fixed interval. We recommend
attaching the foot controller and sewing at a consistent
speed.
Free motion echo quilting foot “E” measurements
a
Select .
b
Touch to set the machine to free motion sewing
mode.
The key appears as , the quilting foot is raised to
the necessary height, then the feed dogs are lowered
for free motion sewing.
c
Remove the presser foot holder and then attach the
adapter. (page 45)
d
Position the free motion echo quilting foot “E” on the
left side of the presser bar with the holes in the foot
and presser bar aligned.
e
Tighten the screw with the included screwdriver
(large).
1 Presser foot holder
screw
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
disc-shaped screwdriver. Otherwise, the
needle may touch the free motion open toe
quilting foot “O”, causing it to break and
causing injury.
1 Stitch
E
E
1 6.4 mm (approx. 1/4
inch)
2 9.5 mm (approx. 3/8
inch)
CAUTION
• Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver (large). Otherwise, the
needle may touch the free motion echo
quilting foot “E”, causing it to break and
causing injury.
b
a
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
79
3
f
Using the measurement on the free motion echo
quilting foot “E” as a guide, sew echo quilting around
the motif.
Finished project
g
Touch to cancel the free motion sewing mode.
Rotate the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to raise the feed dogs.
Blind Hem Stitches
Secure the lower edge of skirts and pants with a blind hem.
a
Turn the skirt or pants inside out.
b
Fold the lower edge of fabric to the desired length to
be hemmed and then press.
c
Using tailor's chalk, mark the fabric about 5 mm
(approx. 3/16 inch) from the edge of the fabric, and
then baste it.
d
Fold back the fabric inside along the basting.
1 6.4 mm (approx.
1/4 inch)
a
Memo
• When the size of cylindrical pieces is too small to
slide onto the arm or the length is too short, the
fabric will not feed and desired results may not be
achieved.
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
4 Desired length for hem
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
4 Desired length for hem
5 5 mm (approx. 3/16
inch)
6 Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Lower edge of fabric
4 Desired length for hem
5 5 mm (approx. 3/16
inch)
6 Basting
7 Basting point
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
a
b
c
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
4
2
1
2
1
2
356
4
1
2
1
3
6
5
1
1
2
7
4
UTILITY STITCHES
80
e
Unfold the edge of fabric, and position the fabric with
the wrong side facing up.
f
Select a stitch.
g
Attach blind stitch foot “R”.
h
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the free arm.
i
Slide the item that you wish to sew onto the free arm,
make sure that the fabric feeds correctly.
j
Position the fabric with the edge of the folded hem
against the guide of the presser foot, and then lower
the presser foot lever.
k
Adjust the stitch width until the needle slightly catches
the fold of the hem. (page 57)
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then use and to decide the
needle drop point. (The stitch width setting is in
neither millimeters nor inches.)
l
Sew with the fold of the hem against the presser foot
guide.
m
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing when you
are finished, and raise the presser foot and needle to
pull the fabric under the presser foot towards the left
of the machine.
n
Remove the basting stitching and turn the fabric with
the right side facing out.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Edge of fabric
4 Desired edge of hem
5 Basting point
6 Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Free arm
1 Wrong side of
fabric
2 Fold of hem
3 Guide
1 Needle drop point
a
b
f
c
a
a
c
d
a
f
a
a
b
e
a
1 Thick fabric
2 Normal fabric
Memo
• Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left needle
drop point does not catch the fold. If the needle
catches too much of the fold, the fabric cannot be
unfolded and the seam appearing on the right side
of the fabric will be very large, leaving an
unattractive finish.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to pull the fabric towards the back of
the machine after sewing. If you pull the fabric
toward side or forward, the presser foot may
be damaged.
1 Wrong side of
fabric
2 Right side of
fabric
a
b
1
2
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
81
3
Shell Tuck Stitches
The gathers that look like shells are called “shell tucks”. They
are used to decorate trims, the front of blouses or cuffs made
of thin fabrics.
a
Draw equally spaced lines along the bias, and then fold
the fabric along the lines.
b
Select , and then increase the thread tension.
c
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
d
Sew while making sure that the needle drops slightly
off the edge of the fabric.
One fold at a time, continue folding the fabric along the
line, then sewing it.
e
After sewing is finished, remove the fabric. Unfold the
fabric, and then iron the tucks down to one side.
Scallop Stitches
The wave-shaped satin stitch is called "scalloping". Use this
stitch to decorate the edges of blouse collars and
handkerchiefs or use it as a hem accent.
a
Select .
b
Attach advanced monogramming foot “N+”.
c
Stitch along the edge of the fabric, making sure not to
sew directly on the edge of the fabric.
d
Trim along the stitches.
• Be careful not to cut the stitches.
Smocking Stitches
The decorative stitch created by stitching or embroidering
over gathers is called “smocking”. It is used to decorate the
front of blouses or cuffs.
The smocking stitch adds texture and elasticity to fabric.
a
Select the straight stitch, and then adjust the stitch
length to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch) and loosen the
thread tension.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Sew parallel stitching at intervals of 1 cm (approx. 3/
8 inch) and pull the bobbin threads to create gathers.
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
d
Select a stitch.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
1 Needle drop
point
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
a
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
UTILITY STITCHES
82
e
Stitch between the straight stitches and pull out the
threads for the straight stitches.
Fagoting
Stitching across an open seam is called “fagoting”. It is used
on blouses and children's clothing. This stitch is more
decorative when thicker thread is used.
a
Use an iron to fold the two pieces of fabric along their
seams.
b
Baste the two pieces of fabric, separated by about 4
mm (approx. 3/16 inch), onto thin paper or a sheet of
water soluble stabilizer.
If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper or
water soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.
c
Select a stitch.
d
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
e
Set the stitch width to 7.0 mm (approx. 1/4 inch).
f
Sew with the center of the presser foot aligned along
the center of the two pieces of fabric.
g
After sewing is finished, remove the paper.
Attaching Tape or Elastic
a
Select a straight stitch and attach presser foot “J”.
b
Set the stitch length to 4.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch),
and loosen the upper thread tension to 2.0 (page 58).
c
Sew two rows of straight stitches on the right side of
the fabric, then pull the bobbin thread to create the
necessary gather.
d
Place the tape over the gather, and hold it in place with
basting pins.
e
Select a stitch.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
1 About 4 mm (approx.
3/16 inch)
2 Thin paper or water
soluble stabilizer
3 Basting stitching
a
b
c
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
Memo
• Be sure that neither automatic reinforcement
nor automatic thread cutting is selected.
Memo
• Before sewing the straight stitch, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) and pull
up the bobbin thread. Holding the top and bobbin
thread, pull a length of thread out from the rear of
the machine. (Be sure that the presser foot is
raised.)
1 Tape
a
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
83
3
f
Sew over the tape (or elastic).
g
Pull out the straight stitch threads.
One-Step Buttonholes
With one-step buttonholes, you can make buttonholes
appropriate to the size of your button.
One-step buttonholes are sewn from the front of the presser
foot to the back, as shown below.
1 Reinforcement stitching
a
Select a buttonhole stitch, and attach buttonhole foot
“A”.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A”.
CAUTION
• Be sure the needle does not strike a basting
pin, or any other objects, during sewing. The
thread could tangle or the needle could break,
causing injury.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
UTILITY STITCHES
84
b
Mark the position and length of the buttonhole on the
fabric.
c
Pull out the button holder plate on the presser foot,
and insert the button that will be put through the
buttonhole. Then tighten the button holder plate
around the button.
d
Align the presser foot with the mark on the fabric, and
lower the presser foot.
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is positioned
behind the metal bracket on the buttonhole foot.
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread, and then start
sewing.
* Feed the fabric carefully by hand while the
buttonhole is sewn.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
g
Press the “Thread Cutter” button once. Raise the
presser foot, and then remove the fabric.
h
Insert a pin along the inside of one of the bar tacks, and
then insert the seam ripper into the center of the
buttonhole and cut towards the pin.
1 Marks on fabric
2 Buttonhole sewing
Memo
• The maximum buttonhole length is about 28 mm
(approx. 1-1/16 inches) (diameter + thickness of
the button).
1 Button holder
plate
Memo
• The size of the buttonhole is determined by the size
of the button in the button holder plate.
1 Mark on the
fabric
2 Marks on the
presser foot
Note
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole foot
backward as far as possible as shown in the
illustration, making sure that there is no gap behind
the part of the foot marked “A”. If the buttonhole
foot is not slid back as far as possible, the
buttonhole will not be sewn at the correct size.
a
b
A
a
b
Memo
• When using the thread cutter on the left side of the
machine or scissors to cut the threads, press the
“Needle Position” button to raise the needle, raise
the presser foot, and then pull out the fabric before
cutting the threads.
1 Basting pin
2 Seam ripper
CAUTION
• When using the seam ripper to open the
buttonhole, do not put your hand or finger in
the path of the ripper. The ripper may slip and
cause injury.
a
b
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
85
3
Sewing Stretch Fabrics
When sewing on stretch fabric with or , sew the
buttonhole stitches over a gimp thread.
a
Hook the gimp thread onto the back of presser foot
“A”. Insert the ends into the grooves at the front of the
presser foot, and then temporarily tie them there.
b
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
c
Once sewing is completed, gently pull the gimp thread
to remove any slack, and trim off any excess.
Odd Shaped Buttons/Buttons that Do Not Fit
into the Button Holder Plate
Add together the diameter and thickness of the button,
and then set the button holder plate to the calculated
length. (The distance between the markings on the presser
foot scale is 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).)
Example: For a button with a diameter of 15 mm (approx.
9/16 inch) and a thickness of 10 mm (approx. 3/8 inch),
the scale should be set at 25 mm (approx. 1 inch).
Four-Step Buttonholes
You can sew 4-step buttonholes using the following 4 stitches
together. You can sew any desired length for the buttonhole
when using 4-step buttonholes. 4-step buttonholes are a good
option when attaching oversize buttons.
Four-step buttonholes are sewn as shown below.
Memo
• For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet punch to
make a hole in the rounded end of the buttonhole.
Then insert a pin along the inside of one of the bar
tacks, insert a seam ripper into the hole made with
the eyelet punch, and cut towards the pin.
Note
• Attach stabilizer material to the back of stretch
fabrics to prevent them from stretching.
1 Upper thread
1 Eyelet punch
2 Basting pin
a
b
a
1 Presser foot scale
2 Button holder plate
3 Combined
measurement of
diameter + thickness
4 5 mm (approx. 3/16
inch)
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
Note
• When changing the stitch settings, make sure that
all stitch settings are changed to match.
a
b
c
d
1 10 mm (approx. 3/8
inch)
2 15 mm (approx. 9/16
inch)
UTILITY STITCHES
86
a
Mark the position and length of the buttonhole on the
fabric.
1 Starting point
2 End point
3 Buttonhole sewing
b
Attach advanced monogramming foot “N+”, and select
stitch to sew the left side of the buttonhole.
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start sewing.
d
Sew the desired length for the buttonhole and press the
“Start/Stop” button again.
e
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and press the
“Start/Stop” button.
The machine will automatically stop after sewing the
bar tack.
f
Select stitch to sew the right side of the
buttonhole, and press the “Start/Stop” button to begin
sewing.
g
Sew the right side of the buttonhole and press the
“Start/Stop” button again.
* Sew the right side of the buttonhole the same length
as the left.
h
Select stitch to sew the bar tack and then press the
“Start/Stop” button.
The machine will automatically sew off the bar tack
tie and stop when the bar tack is complete.
i
Raise the presser foot and remove the fabric.
j
Open the buttonhole (page 84).
b
c
a
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
87
3
Darning
Use darning stitches for mending and other applications.
Darning is performed by sewing from the front of the
presser foot to the back as shown below.
1 Reinforcement stitches
a
Select or , and attach buttonhole foot “A”.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A”.
b
Set the scale to the desired length of the darning.
c
Check that the needle drops at the desired position and
lower the presser foot, making sure the upper thread
passes underneath the buttonhole foot.
d
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is positioned
behind the metal bracket on the buttonhole foot.
e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread, and then
press the “Start/Stop” button to start the machine.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, and then
stops.
1 Presser foot scale
2 Completed length
measurement
3 Width 7 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch)
4 5 mm (approx. 3/
16 inch)
a
d
b
c
Note
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole foot
backward as far as possible as shown in the
illustration, making sure that there is no gap behind
the part of the foot marked “A”. If the buttonhole
foot is not slid back as far as possible, the
buttonhole will not be sewn at the correct size.
UTILITY STITCHES
88
Bar Tacks
Use bar tacks to reinforce areas that will be subject to strain,
such as pocket corners.
a
Select .
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A” and set the scale to the
length of the bar tack you wish to sew.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A”.
c
Set the fabric so that the pocket moves toward you
during sewing.
d
Check the first needle drop point and lower the presser
foot.
e
Lower the buttonhole lever so that it is positioned
behind the metal bracket on the buttonhole foot.
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and start
sewing.
When sewing is completed, the machine will sew
reinforcement stitches and stop automatically.
Bar Tacks On Thick Fabrics
Place a piece of folded fabric or cardboard beside the
fabric being sewn to level the buttonhole foot and allow
for easier and even feeding.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
1 Presser foot scale
2 Completed length
measurement
3 5 mm (approx. 3/16
inch)
Note
• Slide the outside frame of the buttonhole foot
backward as far as possible as shown in the
illustration, making sure that there is no gap behind
the part of the foot marked “A”. If the buttonhole
foot is not slid back as far as possible, the
buttonhole will not be sewn at the correct size.
1 2 mm (approx. 1/16
inch)
a
b
c
a
1 Presser foot
2 Thick paper
3 Fabric
a
b
c
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
89
3
Button Sewing
Buttons with 2 or 4 holes can be attached, using the machine.
a
Select .
The feed dogs are lowered automatically.
b
Raise the presser foot.
c
Attach button fitting foot “M”, slide the button along
the metal plate and into the presser foot, and lower the
presser foot.
d
Rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
to check that the needle goes into each hole correctly.
* If the needle does not reach the holes on the left
side, adjust the stitch width.
e
Gently hold the end of the upper thread and start
sewing.
The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
* To attach the button more securely, repeat the
process.
f
From the wrong side of the fabric, pull the end of the
bobbin thread to pull the upper thread through to the
wrong side of the fabric. Tie the two thread ends
together and cut the threads.
g
After the button is attached, select another stitch and
rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
to raise the feed dogs.
Attaching 4-Hole Buttons
Sew the two holes closest to you. Then raise the presser
foot and move the fabric so that the needle goes into the
next two holes, and sew them in the same way.
Attaching a Shank to the Button
a
Pull the shank lever toward you before sewing.
b
After sewing is finished, pull the two ends of the upper
thread between the button and the fabric, wind them
around the shank, and then tie them firmly together.
c
Tie the ends of the bobbin thread from the beginning
and end of sewing together on the wrong side of the
fabric.
d
Cut off any excess thread.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
Note
• Do not use the automatic thread cutting function
when sewing buttons. Otherwise, you will lose the
thread ends.
1 Button
2 Metal plate
1 Align the buttonholes
with the marks on
button fitting foot “M”.
IMPORTANT
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
button during sewing.
a
b
a
1 Shank lever
a
UTILITY STITCHES
90
Eyelet
Use this stitch for making belt holes and other similar
applications.
a
Select a stitch.
b
Use in either the stitch width display or the
stitch length display to choose the size of the eyelet
(page 57).
c
Attach advanced monogramming foot “N+”, then
rotate the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
to check the needle drop point.
d
Lower the presser foot and start sewing.
When sewing is finished, the machine sews
reinforcement stitches and stops automatically.
e
Use the eyelet punch to make a hole in the center of
the stitching.
Multi-directional Sewing (Straight Stitch and
Zigzag Stitch)
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or emblems to pant
legs, shirt sleeves, etc.
a
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the free-arm.
b
Select and attach advanced monogramming foot
“N+”.
c
Set the needle in the fabric at the sewing start point,
and sew seam “1” as shown.
d
Select and sew seam “2” as shown.
* The fabric will move sideways, guide the fabric by
hand to keep sewing straight.
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
1 Needle drop point
a
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
Memo
• Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the free-arm,
and then sew in the order shown in the illustration.
1 Start Point
a
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
91
3
e
Select and sew seam “3” as shown.
The fabric feeds forward while stitching backward.
f
Select and sew seam “4” as shown.
The seam will be connected to the starting point of
seam 1.
Zipper Insertion
Centered Zipper
Use for bags and other such applications.
a
Select .
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight stitches up to
the zipper opening. Change to a basting stitch
(page 68) and sew to the top of the fabric.
c
Press the seam allowance open and attach the zipper
with a basting stitch in the middle of each side of the
zipper tape.
d
Remove presser foot “J”. Align the right side of the pin
in zipper foot “I” with the presser foot holder, and
attach the zipper foot.
e
Topstitch 7 to 10 mm (approx. 1/4 to 3/8 inch) from
the seamed edge of the fabric, then remove the basting.
Inserting a Side Zipper
Use for side zippers in skirts or dresses.
a
Select .
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
1 Basting stitches
2 Reverse stitches
3 End of zipper opening
4 Wrong side
a
c
b
d
1 Basting stitches
2 Zipper
3 Wrong side
1 Right
2 Left
3 Needle drop
point
Note
• When using zipper foot “I”, make sure the straight
stitch, middle needle position is selected. Rotate
the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to
make sure the needle does not strike the presser
foot.
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
Note
• Make sure you sew using the middle needle
position.
cc
a
b
a
b
c
UTILITY STITCHES
92
b
Attach presser foot “J” and sew straight stitches up to
the zipper opening. Change to a basting stitch and sew
to the top of the fabric.
c
Press the seam allowance open and align the folded
hem along the teeth of the zipper, while maintaining 3
mm (approx. 1/8 inch) of sewing space.
d
Remove presser foot “J”.
e
Align the right side of the pin in zipper foot “I” with
the presser foot holder, and attach the presser foot.
f
Set the presser foot in the 3 mm (approx. 1/8 inch)
margin.
g
Starting from the end of the zipper opening, sew to a
point about 5 cm (approx. 2 inches) from the edge of
the fabric, then stop the machine.
h
Pull down the zipper slider, then continue sewing to
the edge of the fabric.
i
Close the zipper, turn the fabric over, and sew a
basting stitch.
j
Remove the presser foot, and reattach it so that the left
side of the pin is attached to the presser foot holder.
* When sewing the left side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the right side of the presser foot.
When sewing the right side of the zipper, the needle
should drop on the left side of the presser foot.
k
Set the fabric so that the left edge of the presser foot
touches the edge of the zipper teeth.
l
Sew reverse stitches at the top of the zipper, then
continue sewing.
m
Stop sewing about 5 cm (approx. 2 inches) from the
edge of the fabric, leave the needle in the fabric, and
remove the basting stitches.
n
Open the zipper and sew the rest of the seam.
1 Reverse stitches
2 Wrong side of fabric
3 Basting stitches
4 End of zipper opening
1 Zipper pull tab
2 Wrong side of fabric
3 Zipper teeth
4 End of zipper opening
5 3 mm (approx. 1/8
inch)
1 Right
2 Left
3 Needle
drop point
1 About 5 cm (approx.
2 inches)
2 3 mm (approx. 1/8
inch)
CAUTION
• Make sure the needle does not strike the
zipper during sewing. If the needle strikes the
zipper, the needle may break, leading to
injury.
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
c
a
b
1 Front of the skirt
(wrong side of
fabric)
2 Basting stitches
3 Front of the skirt
(right side of
fabric)
4 Back of the skirt
(right side of
fabric)
1 Right
2 Left
3 Needle
drop point
1 Basting
stitches
2 7 to 10 mm
(approx. 1/4
inch to 3/8
inch)
3 Reverse
stitches
4 About 5 cm
(approx. 2
inches)
a
b
c
a
b
c
d
UTILITY STITCHES
VARIOUS STITCHES
93
3
Changing the Start and End Angles of the
Stitch Pattern (Stitch Tapering Function)
The angles of the start and end of stitch patterns can be
changed. This is useful when sewing projects with sharply
defined angles or decorative stitching, attaching appliqués,
etc.
Use the method for finishing sewing the stitch pattern,
according to your needs.
• Method 1: Begin Changing the Angle at the End of
Sewing by Pressing the “Reverse Stitch” Button
(page 93)
• Method 2: Sewing a Specified Number of Stitch
Patterns (page 94)
Method 1: Begin Changing the Angle at the
End of Sewing by Pressing the “Reverse Stitch”
Button
a
Touch , then , and then select a stitch
pattern for stitch tapering.
b
If necessary, change the stitch width and stitch length.
c
Touch .
d
Touch , select the angle settings for the start and
end of sewing, and then touch .
1 Select the start or end of sewing.
2 Select an angle.
3 Specify that the angle does not change.
Note
• Using the same material and stitch pattern as your
project, sew trial stitches to check the result. If
necessary, attach a stabilizer material.
• If reinforcement stitches at the beginning and end
of sewing are needed, use (Reinforcement
stitch button). (Reverse stitch button) cannot
be used for reinforcement stitching when stitch
tapering function is on.
2
1
3
UTILITY STITCHES
94
e
Select the method for finishing sewing. For this
example, since the angle at the end of sewing will
begin changing when (Reverse stitch button) is
pressed, select .
1 Press (Reverse stitch button) for the angle at the
end of sewing to start changing; the machine stops
when sewing is finished.
2 The machine stops when the specified number of stitch
patterns have been sewn. The number of patterns that
are specified includes the number of patterns used to
change the angle. (page 94)
f
If necessary, use a chalk pencil to draw a line at the
location to be sewn.
g
Start sewing.
h
After sewing the desired length, press (Reverse
stitch button).
When (Reverse stitch button) is pressed, the
angle at the end of sewing begins to change, and the
machine stops when sewing is finished.
i
When finished sewing, set [Tapering] to [OFF], and
then touch .
Method 2: Sewing a Specified Number of
Stitch Patterns
With this method, the number of stitch patterns (including
those used to change the angle) are specified. This allows
stitch patterns of the same length to be repeatedly sewn.
a
Refer to steps a through d of “Method 1: Begin
Changing the Angle at the End of Sewing by Pressing
the “Reverse Stitch” Button” on page 93 to select the
angle settings for the start and end of sewing.
b
Touch , and then specify the number of stitch
patterns (including those used to change the angle).
1 Approximate length of the stitch pattern
c
Start sewing.
The machine stops automatically when sewing is
finished.
Memo
• If you stop sewing at the point where end tapering
should begin (either by pressing the “Start/Stop”
button or by lifting your foot from the foot
controller), press (Reverse stitch button) and
resume sewing by either pressing the “Start/Stop”
button or pressing on the foot controller. End
tapering will begin as soon as sewing resumes.
2
1
Memo
• The number of stitch patterns used to change
the angle depends on the pattern and angle.
Perform trial sewing to check the result.
Memo
• To sew stitching in a square, select for the
start of sewing and for the end of sewing, and
then continue sewing the same stitch pattern,
rotating the fabric 90° after sewing each line of
stitching.
The pivot setting is useful when changing the
sewing direction. (page 61)
1
MAKING ADJUSTMENTS
VARIOUS STITCHES
95
3
Saving Settings
Specified angles for start and end, finish tapering method,
and stitch settings can be saved in machine’s memory.
a
After setting the tapering function, touch .
b
Touch .
Retrieving Saved Settings
a
Touch to retrieve the saved setting after
selecting pattern.
b
Touch the numbered key of the settings to be retrieved
and then touch .
* The settings cannot be retrieved if stitch tapering
function is set to [ON].
Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly,
depending on the type or thickness of fabric, the stabilizer
material used, sewing speed, etc. If your sewing does not
turn out well, sew trial stitches using the same conditions
as the real sewing, and adjust the stitch pattern as
explained below. If the stitch pattern does not turn out well
even after making adjustments based on the stitch pattern
described below, make adjustments for each stitch pattern
individually.
a
Touch and select (6-284).
b
Attach advanced monogramming foot “N+” and sew
the stitch pattern.
Be sure to use advanced monogramming foot “N+”.
Adjustments may not be made correctly with any other
presser foot.
c
Compare the finished stitch pattern to the illustration
of the correct stitch pattern below.
d
Touch , and then adjust the stitch pattern with
the [Fine Adjust Verti.] or [Fine Adjust Horiz.] displays.
Memo
• For more information on saving and recalling
settings, refer to “Saving Your Stitch Settings” on
page 59.
MAKING ADJUSTMENTS
Memo
• For details on stitch patterns, refer to “STITCH
SETTING CHART” on page 197.
• This adjustment can be made to (1-36 Quilting
stippling stitch), (2-21 Decorative stippling
stitch), (4-24 Eyelet stitch), (4-25 Star
eyelet stitch), (Q-15 Quilting stippling stitch)
and stitch patterns from the following categories.
MAKING STEP STITCH PATTERNS (FOR 7MM SATIN STITCH PATTERNS ONLY)
96
If the stitch pattern is bunched:
Touch in the [Fine Adjust Verti.] display.
The displayed value increases each time the button is
touched and the stitch pattern will lengthen.
If the stitch pattern has gaps:
Touch in the [Fine Adjust Verti.] display.
The displayed value decreases each time the button
is touched and the stitch pattern will shorten.
If the stitch pattern is skewed to the left:
Touch in the [Fine Adjust Horiz.] display.
The displayed value increases each time the button is
touched and the stitch pattern will slide to the right.
If the stitch pattern is skewed to the right:
Touch in the [Fine Adjust Horiz.] display.
The displayed value decreases each time the button
is touched and the stitch pattern will slide to the left.
e
Sew the stitch pattern again.
* If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
comes out correctly.
f
Touch to return to the original screen.
You can use keys to create a step effect, also
called step stitch patterns.
• Touch to move the stitch pattern a
distance equal to half of the stitch pattern’s size to
the left or right.
• To combine the stitch patterns, refer to page 53.
Example:
a
Select (9-11).
b
Touch so that it displays .
c
Touch .
The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
d
Select (9-11) again.
Memo
• You can sew with the setting screen on the display.
MAKING STEP STITCH PATTERNS
(FOR 7MM SATIN STITCH
PATTERNS ONLY)
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
VARIOUS STITCHES
97
3
e
Touch .
The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
f
Touch .
The entered stitch pattern is repeated.
Saving Stitch Patterns
You can save stitch patterns that you have customized in the
machine's memory or USB media.
a
Touch .
b
When saving the stitch pattern in a USB media, insert
the USB media into the USB port on the machine.
c
Touch the desired destination to start saving.
1 Save to the machine’s memory.
2 Save to the USB media.
The stitch pattern is saved in a folder labeled [bPocket].
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Memo
• For more information about the memory function,
refer to “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 194.
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Saving…] screen is displayed. You will lose the
stitch pattern you are saving.
2
1
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
98
Retrieving Stitch Patterns
Retrieve stitch patterns saved in the machine's memory or
USB media.
a
When retrieving stitch patterns from a USB media,
insert the USB media into the USB port on the
machine.
b
Touch the desired destination.
1 Retrieve from the machine’s memory.
2 Retrieve from a USB media.
When retrieving stitch patterns from a USB media, insert
the USB media into the USB port on the machine.
3 Retrieve via the wireless network.
c
Select the desired stitch pattern, and then touch .
Memo
• If the stitch pattern to be retrieved is in a folder of
the USB media, touch the key for that folder. Touch
to return to the previous screen.
• Folders in the USB media cannot be created with
the machine.
• Touch to retrieve stitch patterns via the
wireless network. For detailed procedures, refer to
PE-DESIGN manual (Version 11 or later).
• For details on supported file extensions, refer to
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 194.
1 2 3
Note
• When you touch , the selected stitch pattern
will be deleted permanently.
MY CUSTOM STITCH
VARIOUS STITCHES
99
3
Designing a Stitch
By using the MY CUSTOM STITCH function, you can
register stitches you have created yourself. You can also
sew designs combining MY CUSTOM STITCH creations
with built-in characters (page 53).
a
Draw the stitch design on the grid sheet.
Place points where the stitch pattern intersects with
the grid, and connect all the points with a line.
b
Determine the x and y coordinates of each of the
marked points.
MY CUSTOM STITCH Screen
1 This area displays the stitch being created.
2 Displays the number of the present set point over the
total number of points in the stitch.
3 Displays the y-coordinate of over the x-coordinate
of .
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Memo
• Stitches that you create with MY CUSTOM STITCH
can be a maximum of 7 mm (approx. 9/32 inch)
wide and 37 mm (approx. 1-1/3 inches) long.
Memo
• Simplify the design so that it can be sewn as a
continuous line. For a more attractive stitch, close
the design by intersecting lines.
If the design is to be repeated and linked, the start
point and end point of the design should be at the
same height.
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Key Name
4 Touch this key to select whether
one or three stitches will be sewn
between two points.
100
Single/triple
stitching key
5 Touch this key to delete a selected
point.
—
Point delete
key
6 Touch this key to exit the entering
stitch data screen.
—
Return key
7 Touch this key to sew a test of the
stitch.
—
Test key
8 Touch this key to store the stitch
being created.
—
MY CUSTOM
STITCH
memory key
9 Touch this key to group points
together and move them together.
100
Block move
key
0 Touch this key to insert new points
on the stitch design.
101
Insert key
A
Use these keys to move over
the display area, and touch the set
key in the center to set a point on
the stitch design.
100-101
Arrow keys
and set key
1
B
9
8
7
2
4
6
3
5
F
A
0
D
C
E
MY CUSTOM STITCH
100
a
Touch and then .
b
Touch .
c
Use to move to the coordinates of the first
point on the grid.
d
Touch to add the point indicated by .
e
Select whether single stitch or triple stitches will be
sewn between the first two points.
* To sew three stitches, touch the key so that it
appears as .
f
Repeat the steps for each point that you have drawn on
the grid sheet until the stitch design is drawn on the
screen as a continuous line.
g
Once you finish entering the stitch data, touch
to save the stitch pattern.
Moving a Point
a
Touch or to move to the point that you
want to move.
b
Use to move the point.
Moving Part or All of the Design
a
Touch or to move to the first point of the
section that you want to move.
* To move to the first point, touch .
* To move to the last point, touch .
B
Use these keys to move from
point to point on the stitch, or to
the first or last point entered on
the stitch.
100
Point-to-point
key
C Touch this key to edit the utility
stitches in the machine.
—
Stitch edit key
D Touch this key to change the
direction of the grid sheet.
—
Grid direction
key
E Touch this key to see an enlarged
version of the stitch being created.
—
Enlarger key
F Touch this key to view an image of
the stitch.
—
Image key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Key Name
MY CUSTOM STITCH
VARIOUS STITCHES
101
3
b
Touch .
The selected point and all points that were entered
after it are selected.
c
Touch or to move the section and touch .
The section will be moved.
Inserting New Points
a
Touch or to move to a place on the
design where you want to add a new point.
* To move to the first point, touch .
* To move to the last point, touch .
b
Touch to insert a new point.
c
Use to move the point.
Retrieving Saved Stitch Patterns
a
Touch .
b
Select the device to retrieve the stitch pattern from.
c
Select the stitch pattern.
* You can start sewing when this screen is displayed.
1 Stored stitch patterns
2 Edit the stitch pattern.
3 Delete the stitch pattern.
3
2
1
MY CUSTOM STITCH
102
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
103
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Embroidery Step by Step
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for
embroidery.
Attaching Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED
Pointer
a
Remove the presser foot and presser foot holder.
(page 45)
b
Position the embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
on the presser foot bar by aligning the notch of the
presser foot to the large screw.
Side view
c
Hold the embroidery foot in place with your right
hand, and then use the disc-shaped screwdriver to
securely tighten the presser foot holder screw.
1 Presser foot holder screw
Chapter 4
BASIC EMBROIDERY
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
Step # Aim Action Page
1 Presser foot
attachment
Attach embroidery foot “W+”
with LED pointer.
103
2 Checking the
needle
Use needle 75/11 for
embroidery.
42
3 Embroidery unit
attachment
Attach the embroidery unit. 104
4 Bobbin thread
setup
For the bobbin thread, wind
embroidery bobbin thread and
set it in place.
30
5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to
the fabric, and hoop it in the
embroidery frame.
126
6 Pattern selection Turn the main power to ON,
and select an embroidery
pattern.
105
7 Embroidery frame
attachment
Attach the embroidery frame
to the embroidery unit.
129
8 Checking the
layout
Check and adjust the size and
position of the embroidery.
130
9Embroidery upper
thread setup
Set up embroidery upper
thread according to the
pattern.
36
Step 3
Step 1, 2
Step 7
Step 5
Step 4
Step 6, 8
Step 9
CAUTION
• When attaching an embroidery foot, always
touch on the screen. You may
accidentally press the “Start/Stop” button and
possibly cause injury.
• Be sure to use the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer when doing embroidery. Using
another embroidery foot may cause the needle
to strike the embroidery foot, causing the
needle to break and possibly causing injury.
CAUTION
• Use the disc-shaped screwdriver to firmly
tighten the presser foot holder screw. If the
screw is loose, the needle may strike the
embroidery foot and break, possibly cause
injury.
a
BEFORE EMBROIDERING
104
d
Plug the connector of the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer into the jack on the back left side of your
machine.
e
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
All keys and operation buttons are unlocked, and the
previous screen is displayed.
About the Embroidery Unit
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
a
Turn the main power to OFF, and remove the flat bed
attachment.
b
Insert the embroidery unit connection into the
connection port of the machine until it snaps into
place.
c
Turn the main power to ON.
The following message will appear.
d
Touch .
The carriage will move to the initialization position.
CAUTION
• Do not move the machine with the embroidery
unit attached. The embroidery unit could fall
off and cause injury.
IMPORTANT
• Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Damage or
malfunction may result.
• Be sure to turn off the power before attaching
or removing the embroidery unit. Otherwise,
the machine may be damaged.
• Do not touch the inner connector of the
embroidery unit. The pins on the embroidery
unit connection may be damaged.
• Do not apply strong force to the embroidery
unit carriage or pick up the unit by the
carriage. Otherwise, the embroidery unit may
be damaged.
• Do not push on the carriage when attaching
the embroidery unit onto the machine. Moving
the carriage may damage the embroidery unit.
• Make sure that there is enough space for the
carriage of the embroidery unit to move. If the
embroidery frame comes into contact with an
object, the pattern may not be embroidered
correctly, or damage may result.
• Do not touch the embroidery carriage until the
initialization finishes.
Note
• To avoid distorting your embroidery design, do not
touch the embroidery carriage and frame when the
machine is embroidering.
• Store the embroidery unit in a safe place to prevent
damage to the unit.
Memo
• You can also sew utility/decorative stitches with
the embroidery unit attached. Touch and
. The feed dogs will automatically raise for
utility and decorative stitching.
Note
• Be sure there is no gap between the embroidery
unit and the machine. If there is a gap, the
embroidery patterns will not embroider with the
correct registration.
SELECTING PATTERNS
105
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Removing the Embroidery Unit
a
Remove the embroidery frame.
• For details on removing the embroidery frame, refer
to “Removing the Embroidery Frame” on page 129.
b
Touch , then touch .
The carriage will move to the removal position.
c
Turn the main power to OFF.
d
Press the release button, and pull the embroidery unit
away from the machine.
Copyright Information
The patterns stored in the machine and patterns sold
separately are intended for private use only. Any public or
commercial use of copyrighted patterns is an infringement
of copyright law and is strictly prohibited.
About Embroidery Patterns
There are many character and decorative embroidery
patterns stored in the machine’s memory (see the
“Embroidery Design Guide” for a full summary of patterns
in the machine’s memory or visit https://s.brother/cmekb/
).
You can also use patterns sold separately.
1 Embroidery patterns
2 Character patterns
3 Decorative alphabet patterns
4 Frame patterns
5 Utility embroidery patterns
6 Couching patterns (page 156)
7 Pattern type selection keys
8 My Design Center (page 161)
9 Patterns saved in the machine’s memory, USB media,
etc. (page 154)
0 Touch this key to position the embroidery unit for
storage.
SELECTING PATTERNS
1
0
2
3
4
5
7
9
8
6
SELECTING PATTERNS
106
Selecting Embroidery Patterns
a
Touch the category tab and then touch the pattern type
selection key or pattern key you want to embroider.
1 Pattern category tab
2 Pattern type/pattern selection key
b
Select a pattern.
* Touch the category tab or to return to the
previous screen.
The selected pattern is displayed.
c
Touch to set the pattern.
* Touch to darken the background color for the
pattern image with bright thread colors, to get a
clearer image.
The pattern is designated with a red box around it on
the edit screen.
d
Touch to edit the selected pattern.
(page 111)
e
Touch .
The embroidery screen appears.
1
2
SELECTING PATTERNS
107
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
f
Touch to edit the pattern before
embroidering. (page 124)
* To return to the edit screen, touch .
g
Start embroidering. (page 138)
Selecting Character Patterns
a
Touch .
b
Touch the key of the font you want to embroider.
* : View the next page.
: View the previous page.
c
Select the character category and then type in the text.
(page 108)
d
Touch .
The edit screen appears.
e
Follow the steps from d to g of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns” on page 106.
SELECTING PATTERNS
108
Character Pattern Input Keys
Memo
• If a key display is grayed out, you cannot use that
function with the selected pattern.
No.
Display Explanation
Name
1 Return to the previous screen.
Return key
2 Change the size of the character patterns.
To change the size of one character, touch
to display and then select
the character. The size of the selected
character is changed.
Size key
3 Change the configuration of the character
patterns.
• To arrange the character patterns on an
arc, touch , , or .
: Make the arc flatter.
: Make the arc rounder.
• To arrange the character patterns on an
incline, touch .
: Change the incline
counterclockwise.
: Change the incline clockwise.
• : Reset the layout.
Array key
4 Change the spacing of the character
patterns.
• : Increase the character spacing.
• : Decrease the character spacing.
• To change the spacing after one character,
touch to display and then
select the character. The spacing between
the selected character and the next
character is changed.
• : Move the one selected character
up.
• : Move the one selected character
down.
• : Reset the spacing.
Character
spacing key
0
9
8
A
B
C
5 76431 2
5 Switch alignment. This function is available
when multiple lines of characters are input.
• : Right alignment
• : Left alignment
• :
Center alignment
Alignment key
6 Change the font of the characters.
Depending on the font that was selected, it
may not be possible to change the font.
• To change the font of one character, touch
to display and then
select the character. The font of the
selected character is changed.
Font Type key
7 Apply the character pattern editing.
Set key
8 Enter a space.
Space key
9 Make a new line.
Line feed key
0 Delete the character.
Delete key
A - Select the category of character.
Category keys
B Select to edit all characters or one character.
• : Edit all characters.
• : Edit one character.
Select one/all
key
C Move the cursor and select a character.
Character
selection keys
No.
Display Explanation
Name
SELECTING PATTERNS
109
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Selecting Frame Patterns
a
Touch .
b
Touch the key of the frame shape you want to
embroider in the top part of the screen.
1 Frame shapes
2 Frame patterns
Various frame patterns are displayed at the bottom
part of the screen.
c
Touch the key of the frame pattern you want to
embroider.
The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.
d
Touch .
The edit screen appears.
e
Follow the steps from d to g of “Selecting
Embroidery Patterns” on page 106.
Combining Patterns
Example:
a
Select a pattern and then touch .
b
Touch .
c
Touch .
d
Select and enter “LOVE”.
The characters you enter will be displayed in the
center of the embroidery pattern area.
e
Touch .
f
Touch and then touch .
g
Use to move the characters.
* Characters can also be moved by directly dragging
them with your finger or the touch pen.
1
2
SELECTING PATTERNS
110
h
Touch .
i
Touch to change the color of the characters.
(page 120)
j
Touch .
k
When all editing is finished, touch .
Selecting a Pattern
If multiple patterns have been combined, use
to select the pattern to be edited. Patterns
can also be selected by directly touching the screen with
your finger or touch pen.
Selecting Multiple Patterns at the Same Time
Multiple patterns can easily be edited, for example, when
moving patterns, if they are all selected together.
a
Touch .
b
Touch each pattern to be selected.
1 Touch or to check the patterns to be selected,
and then touch . The selected patterns are
highlighted with a red box. To deselect the selected
patterns, touch .
2 Touch this key to deselect all selected patterns.
3 Touch this key to select all patterns in the pattern display
area.
4 Patterns can be moved with this key.
c
Touch to return to the edit screen.
Each selected pattern is surrounded with a red box.
Memo
• Combined patterns will be embroidered in the
order they were entered.
Memo
• You can also select multiple patterns by dragging
your finger to specify the area of selection.
Memo
• The following functions are available while multiple
patterns are selected.
-Moving
-Copying
-Grouping
-Stippling
- Extracting pattern outlines
1
2
4
3
EDITING PATTERNS
111
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Grouping Patterns
If the multiple patterns are grouped, they can be edited as
a single pattern.
a
Select patterns you want to group. (page 110)
b
Touch .
The selected patterns are grouped.
* To ungroup a grouped pattern, select the grouped
pattern, and then touch . At this time, multiple
patterns are selected. To cancel the multiple
selection, touch any other pattern or the blank area.
Using these keys, you can edit the pattern as you like.
1 Size of the entire combined pattern
2 Size of the pattern currently selected
3 Distance from the center of the frame to the center of the
pattern currently selected
4 Degree of rotation for the pattern currently selected
5 Color sequence and stitching times of each step of the
pattern
Key Functions
Touch to display the editing window.
Memo
• The following functions are applied to all patterns in
the grouped pattern.
-Moving
-Rotating
- Appliqué
-Border
- Extracting pattern outlines
- Simple stippling
- Thread color changing
EDITING PATTERNS
Memo
• If a key display is grayed out, you cannot use that
function with the selected pattern.
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
1 Display the pattern moving
window.
• : Move the pattern in
the direction shown by the
arrow.
• : Center the pattern.
109
Move key
2
1
5
3
4
L K H GI
O
P
1
3
5
7
9
A
C
E
2
4
6
8
0
B
D
N
M
J
F
EDITING PATTERNS
112
2 Display the pattern sizing window.
• : Decrease the pattern
proportionately.
• : Decrease the pattern
vertically.
• : Decrease the pattern
horizontally.
• : Enlarge the pattern
proportionately.
• : Stretch the pattern
vertically.
• : Stretch the pattern
horizontally.
• : Change the size of the
character patterns.
• : Reset the size. (except for
character patterns.)
• : Move the pattern in
the direction shown by the
arrow.
114
Size key
3 Display the pattern rotating
window.
• : Reset the position.
• : Move the pattern in
the direction shown by the
arrow.
You can also rotate the pattern by
dragging the red point at the
corners of the pattern.
—
Rotate key
4 Group selected multiple patterns. 111
Group key
5 Duplicate the pattern. —
Duplicate key
6 Change the pattern to a horizontal
mirror image.
—
Horizontal
mirror image
key
7 Make and edit the repeated
pattern.
114
Border key
8 Allows the thread density to
change for some Alphabet
characters and frame patterns.
Other patterns density can be
modified after the pattern size is
changed.
114
Density key
9 Change the thread color. 121
Thread palette
key
0 Create an appliqué outline of the
pattern.
144
Appliqué key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
A Separate the continuous character
patterns to adjust the spacing or
edit separately afterwards.
• : Select where the
patterns is to be separated.
• : Separate the patten. A
separated character pattern
cannot be combined again.
—
Separate key
B Edit character patterns. 108, 113
Letter Edit key
C Extract the outline of the pattern.
The extracted pattern can be used
with My Design Center.
176
Outline key
D Touch this key to create stippling,
echo quilting, or decorative fill
around a pattern.
159
Stippling key
E Touch this key to specify not to
embroider the selected thread
color.
119
Deselect
region setting
(no sew
setting) key
F Touch this key when you want to
change the thread color, character
by character in character
embroidery. Since the machine
stops at the end of each character,
the upper thread can be changed
as you embroider.
—
Multi color key
G Proceed to the embroidery screen. —
Embroidery
key
H Save a pattern in the machine’s
memory or USB media. The
pattern can also be transferred to
a computer via a wireless network
connection.
153
Memory key
I Redo the last operation that was
undone.
—
Redo key
J Undo the last operation. —
Undo key
K Delete the selected pattern (the
pattern outlined by the red box).
—
Delete key
L Add another pattern to the editing
pattern.
109
Add key
M Select the pattern to edit when
there are multiple patterns.
110
Pattern select
key
N Make multiple patterns to be
selected at the same time.
110
Multiple
selection key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
EDITING PATTERNS
113
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Editing Letters
For details on input keys, refer to “Character Pattern Input
Keys” on page 108.
Previewing the Pattern
a
Touch .
An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered
appears.
b
Touch to select the frame used in
the preview.
* Frames displayed in gray cannot be selected.
* Touch to enlarge the image of the pattern.
* The pattern can be embroidered as it appears in the
display.
c
Touch to check the embroidering order.
The stitch simulator screen appears.
1 Simulation speed keys
2 Operation keys
: Start the simulation at the set speed.
: Pause the simulation.
: Stop the simulation.
O
• : Magnify the image.
Use / / / to
scroll through the display in any
direction.
• : Demagnify the image
(minimum: 100%).
• : Select the percent of
magnification.
—
Magnify keys
P Preview the embroidered image. 113
Image key
Memo
• To edit character patterns with multiple lines in the
edit screen, ungroup the pattern. (page 111)
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
1
2
EDITING PATTERNS
114
* Touch to return to the embroidery frame
selection screen.
d
Touch .
Changing the Size and the Density of the
Pattern
If is selected, you can change the pattern size while
maintaining the thread density. The machine recalculates the
stitch density automatically. With this function, the pattern
will be enlarged or reduced at a larger ratio than with normal
pattern resizing.
a
Touch , and then touch .
b
Select in the size window.
* : Change the pattern size while maintaining
the number of stitches. Enlarged patterns will be less
dense, and reduced patterns will be more dense. In
order to maintain embroidering quality, there is a
limit to how much the embroidery pattern can be
enlarged or reduced.
* : Change the pattern size while maintaining
the thread density. After the pattern size is changed,
the thread density can be changed in the edit screen.
The number of stitches is recalculated depending on
the pattern size.
c
Select the direction in which to change the pattern
size.
d
When you select in step b, touch , and
then touch to change the thread density.
* : Make the pattern less dense.
* : Make the pattern more dense.
e
Touch .
Creating Repeated Patterns
Using the border function, you can create repeated patterns.
You can also adjust the spacing of the patterns.
a
Touch , and then touch .
b
Select the direction in which the pattern will be
repeated.
* : Repeat the pattern above.
* : Repeat the pattern below.
* : Delete above pattern.
* : Delete below pattern.
Memo
• This function cannot be used with alphabet
character patterns, frame patterns, repeated
patterns or buttonhole patterns.
• Patterns with a large number of stitches (100,001
or more) cannot be resized while maintaining a
thread density.
• You can also change the size by dragging the red
point at the sides and corners of the pattern.
EDITING PATTERNS
115
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Vertical direction
1 Repeating and deleting keys
2 Spacing keys
3 Key to cancel pattern repeating
Horizontal direction
1 Repeating and deleting keys
2 Spacing keys
3 Key to cancel pattern repeating
c
Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
* : Widen spacing.
* : Tighten spacing.
d
Complete repeated patterns by repeating steps b
through
c.
e
Touch .
Repeating Patterns Using the Matrix Copy
Place the pattern repeatedly throughout the embroidery
area.
a
Touch .
b
Touch .
The repeated pattern is displayed positioned
throughout the area.
c
Adjust the spacing of the repeated pattern.
* : Widen spacing.
* : Tighten spacing.
Every time the key is pressed, the pattern is
automatically re-laid out.
d
Touch .
e
Touch .
2
1
3
2
1
3
EDITING PATTERNS
116
Repeating One Element of a Repeated Pattern
You can select one element of a repeated pattern and
repeat only that single element. This function allows you
to create complex repeated patterns.
a
Touch .
b
Choose the direction in which the repeated pattern will
be cut.
*
: Cut horizontally.
*
: Cut vertically.
The pattern direction indicator will change
depending on the direction selected.
c
Use and to select the cut line.
d
Touch .
The repeated pattern will be divided into separate
elements.
e
Touch .
f
Use and to select the element to repeat.
g
Repeat the selected element.
h
Touch .
EDITING PATTERNS
117
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Color Sorting Repeated Patterns
Touch to automatically change the embroidering
order of colors in combined border embroidery patterns so
that the same color can be continuously embroidered.
This allows you to continue embroidering without
repeatedly changing the upper thread or changing the
embroidering order manually.
Assigning Thread Marks
By sewing thread marks, you can easily align patterns
when rehooping the fabric to embroider a series. When
embroidering is finished on a pattern, a thread mark in the
shape of an arrow will be sewn using the final thread.
When embroidering a series of patterns, use the point of
this arrow for positioning the following designs to be
embroidered.
a
Touch .
b
Touch .
c
Touch to select the thread mark to be sewn.
d
Touch .
Memo
• When a grouped pattern is repeated, the
embroidering order is changed in each pattern.
• If there are repeated patterns with other repeated
patterns or other patterns, the embroidering order
of only the repeated patterns is changed.
Memo
• When there are two or more elements, use or
to select an element to assign a thread
mark(s) to.
EDITING PATTERNS
118
Embroidering the Pattern Repeatedly
After creating the repeated pattern, rehoop the embroidery
frame and keep embroidering for the next pattern.
a
Select the repeated pattern and assign the thread mark
at the center of the bottom of the pattern.
* Refer to “Assigning Thread Marks” on page 117.
b
Touch , then .
c
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
When embroidering is finished, the thread mark is
embroidered with the last thread color.
d
Remove the embroidery frame.
e
Rehoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
f
Attach the embroidery frame to the machine, and then
touch .
g
Touch to set the starting point to the center top of
the pattern.
h
Touch .
i
Touch , and then touch .
Note
• Adjust the position of the fabric so that the
embroidering area for the next pattern is within the
embroidering area.
1 Pattern embroidered first
2 Position of pattern to be embroidered next
3 Embroidering area
c
a
b
EDITING PATTERNS
119
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
j
Touch to move the embroidery frame until
the thread mark on the fabric is aligned with the light
of the LED pointer.
* To check the needle drop point with the light of the
LED pointer, touch .
k
Touch .
l
Remove the thread mark.
m
Start embroidering.
Deselect Region Setting (No Sew Setting)
The deselect region setting (which specifies that a thread color
will not be embroidered) can be applied to a part of the
pattern with a specific color.
a
Touch in the embroidering edit screen.
b
From the thread color sequence display, select the
thread color that will not be embroidered.
The selected thread color is highlighted in blue.
c
Touch .
The mark appears to indicate that the selected
thread color will not be embroidered.
The parts of the pattern that will not be embroidered
are hidden in the pattern preview screen.
Memo
• For the accurate needle drop point, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to lower
the needle. Then, turn the handwheel away from
you (clockwise) until the mark on the handwheel is
at the top. The carriage cannot move if the mark on
the handwheel is not at the top.
1 Mark
a
Memo
• To cancel the setting, select the thread color and
touch .
EDITING COLORS
120
d
If necessary, repeat steps b and c for all thread
colors that will not be embroidered.
e
After specifying the desired settings, touch .
f
Touch and then touch to check an enlarged
image of the finished embroidery.
* After deselecting a region, check the image to be
sure no previously hidden stitches are visible.
Changing the Thread Color
You can change the thread color by moving the color to be
changed to the top of the embroidering order and selecting a
new color from the thread colors in the machine.
a
Touch , and then touch .
The thread color palette appears.
b
Touch the color of the part to be changed.
* Touch or to display the thread color that is
not on the screen.
The selected thread color image appears.
1 Selected thread color image
Memo
• When a pattern with the deselect region setting
applied is saved, the deselect region setting is also
saved. However, the pattern cannot be saved if the
deselect region setting is applied to all thread
colors.
• The parts with the deselect region setting applied
are merely not displayed; they are not deleted. The
embroidery area required to embroider the pattern
is the same as for the original pattern.
EDITING COLORS
Memo
• When you directly touch a part of the pattern
whose color is to be changed, the part can be
selected and displayed.
1
EDITING COLORS
121
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
c
Select a new color from the thread color palette, and
then touch .
* To return to the original color, touch . If
multiple colors have been changed, this command
will return all colors to their original colors.
1 Thread brand for colors
2 Thread color palette
The display shows the changed colors.
Finding New Color Schemes with the Color
Shuffling Function
With the color shuffling function, the machine suggests new
color schemes for the embroidery pattern that you have
selected. After you select the desired effect ([Random],
[Vivid], [Gradient] or [Soft]), sample color schemes for the
selected effect are displayed.
a
Touch , and then touch .
b
Touch .
c
Select the thread brand for colors and the number of
colors you want to create the pattern with.
1 Thread brand for colors
2 Number of colors to be used
d
Select the desired effect.
1 Effects for schemes
If you select [Random] or [Gradient], the color
specifying screen will appear.
If you select [Vivid] or [Soft], proceed to step
g.
Memo
• Touch to specify a thread color by entering
its number. If you enter the wrong number, touch
, and then enter the correct number. After
entering the number, touch .
2
1
Memo
• This function may not be available depending on
the pattern you select (ex. a repeated pattern,
licensed pattern).
2
1
1
EDITING COLORS
122
e
Touch to set and specify the thread
color to use in the effect.
* If you don’t need to specify the thread color, just set
to .
[Manual] setting for [Random]
You can select up to 6 colors to be used in the [Random]
effect. The effect will be created using the selected colors.
1 Select colors from the palette.
2 Selected colors are listed.
[Manual] setting for [Gradient]
You can select one color to be used in the [Gradient] effect.
The effect will be created with a color you select.
1 Select a color from the palette.
2 Selected color is displayed.
f
Touch .
g
Select the desired color scheme from samples.
* Touch to add the new schemes.
1 Touch to review the previous schemes.
1
2
1
2
1
EDITING COLORS
123
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
h
Select the displayed color scheme.
* : Return to the previous screen.
* or : Display the other color schemes.
* : Select the displayed color scheme.
The thread color palette screen will appear.
Thread Color Sorting
This function allows you to embroider while replacing the
thread spool a minimal number of times.
Before starting to embroider, touch in the embroidery
screen to rearrange the embroidery order and sort it by thread
colors.
a
Touch in the embroidery screen.
b
Touch .
* Touch again to check the sorted thread
colors.
The embroidery color order is rearranged and sorted
by thread colors.
* Touch , then to cancel color sorting
and embroider with the original embroidery color
order.
Memo
• To temporarily register your favorite schemes,
touch (to release your favorite schemes, touch
again). 9 color schemes can be added. Touch
to check the registered favorite
schemes.
To cancel the registration, touch .
• Maximum 20 pages of schemes can be reviewed.
Note
• This function does not work on overlapping
patterns.
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN
124
* This screen appears when embroidery starts.
1 The presser foot symbol
Attach embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer or
embroidery foot “W” (sold separately) for all embroidery
projects.
2 A preview of the pattern
3 The boundary for embroidering with the selected frame
in the settings screen
4 Total number of stitches in the selected pattern and
number of stitches that have already been embroidered
5 The time necessary to embroider the pattern, and the
time already spent embroidering the pattern (not
including time for changing and automatically trimming
the thread)
6 The number of colors in the pattern, and the number of
the color currently being embroidered
7 Switch the progress bar (which shows the embroidering
progress) between showing only one color or all colors.
This key appears after starting embroidering or after
touching the key.
8 The part of the embroidery pattern that will be
embroidered with the thread color at the top of the list
9 The order for thread color changes and the embroidering
time for each thread color
* The displayed time is the approximate time that will
be required. The actual embroidering time may be
longer than the displayed time, depending on the
embroidery frame that is used. In addition, the
amount of time required to change thread colors is
not included.
Key Functions
Using these keys, you can move or rotate pattern, etc.
Touch to display the editing window.
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY
SCREEN
9
1
2
3
7
4 5 6
8
Note
• Some operations or functions are not available for
certain patterns. If the key display is grayed out,
you cannot use that function or operation with the
selected pattern.
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
1 Turn on the light of the LED
pointer.
Touch this key to check the needle
drop point with the light of the LED
pointer.
130
Needle point
check key
2 Shows the embroidery frames that
can be used for the selected
pattern.
Be sure to use the proper frame.
127
Available
frames
3 Shows the size of the selected
pattern.
—
Pattern size
4 Preview the embroidery image. 113
Image key
5 Shows the distance between the
embroidering position and the
center (when the embroidery
pattern is moved).
—
Distance
6 Shows the degree of rotation of
the pattern.
—
Degree
7 Display the pattern moving
window.
—
Move key
8 Display the pattern rotating
window.
—
Rotate key
9 Add the basting stitch around the
pattern. You can select the
distance from the pattern to the
basting stitching.
22, 143
Basting key
8
EFH G
4
0
B
1
DI
7
9
A
3
2
5
6
C
VIEWING THE EMBROIDERY SCREEN
125
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
0 Change the setting to embroider
the pattern with a single color.
Touch the key again to return to
the original setting.
Even if uninterrupted embroidering
has been set, the automatic
thread cutting function and the
thread trimming function can be
used.
The icons of the spool of thread
are grayed out.
—
Uninterrupted
embroidery
key
A Touch this key to rearrange the
stitching sequence for combined
patterns.
123
Thread color
sorting key
B Touch this key to align the
embroidering position.
132
Embroidery
positioning
key
C Switch on/off the 2-point
embroidery positioning function
with a LED pointer.
133
2-point
embroidery
positioning
function with a
LED pointer
on/off key
D Save the pattern to the machine’s
memory or USB media. The
pattern can also be transferred to
a computer via a wireless network
connection.
153
Memory key
E Check the position of the pattern.
• : Move the carriage to
trace the embroidery area of the
pattern. This allows you to
check that there is enough
space to embroider the pattern.
• : Move the carriage to
the selected position.
132
Trace key
F Specify the needle start position.
• : Set the needle start
position to the lower-left
• corner of the pattern. This
setting is useful when
connecting patterns since it
allows you to continue
embroidering until the first stitch
of the next pattern.
• : Move the carriage to
the selected position.
151, 152
Starting point
key
G Move the needle forward or back
in the pattern; useful if the thread
breaks while embroidering or if
you want to start again from the
beginning.
141
Forward/Back
key
H Set automatic thread cutting,
thread trimming or the thread
tension. For embroidery, these
functions are set automatically.
147-150
Cut/Tension
key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
I Return to the edit screen. —
Return key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
PREPARING THE FABRIC
126
Attaching Iron-on Stabilizers (Backing) to
the Fabric
a
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the wrong side of
the fabric.
• Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger than the
embroidery frame being used.
PREPARING THE FABRIC
CAUTION
• Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 2 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch). Using fabrics thicker than
2 mm (approx. 1/16 inch) may cause the
needle to break and cause injury.
Memo
• When using layers with thicker batting etc., you can
embroider more attractive finishes by adjusting the
embroidery presser foot height in the embroidery
settings screen.
Touch , and use and in the
[Embroidery Foot Height] in the embroidery
settings screen. Adjust the presser foot height for
thick or puffy fabrics.
• To increase the space between the embroidery foot
and the needle plate, set the [Embroidery Foot
Height] to a larger number.
• In the case of thick terry cloth towels, we
recommend that you place a piece of water soluble
stabilizer on the top surface of the towel. This will
help to reduce the nap of the toweling and result in
more attractive embroidery.
CAUTION
• Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery
when embroidering on stretch fabrics,
lightweight fabrics, fabrics with a coarse
weave, or fabrics which cause pattern
shrinkage. Otherwise, the needle may break
and cause injury.
1 Fusible side of stabilizer
2 Fabric (wrong side)
3 Size of the embroidery
frame
a
b
c
Memo
• When embroidering small pieces of fabric that
cannot be hooped in an embroidery frame, use
stabilizer material as a base. After lightly ironing the
fabric to the stabilizer material, hoop it in the
embroidery frame. If stabilizer material cannot be
ironed onto the fabric, attach it with a basting
stitch. After completing the embroidery, remove the
stabilizer material carefully.
• When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such as
towel or corduroy, use water soluble stabilizer (sold
separately) for best results. The water soluble
stabilizer material will dissolve completely in water,
giving the project a more attractive finish.
1 Fabric
2 Stabilizer
3 Basting
a
b
c
PREPARING THE FABRIC
127
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame
Types of Embroidery Frames
Optional embroidery frames can be used. When choosing
frames that do not appear on the screen, be sure to check
the design size of the embroidery field of the optional
frame. Check with your authorized Brother dealer for
frame compatibility.
Select a frame that matches the pattern size. Available
frame options are displayed on the LCD.
1 Highlighted: Can be used
2 Shaded: Cannot be used
Inserting the Fabric
a
Lift-up and loosen the frame adjustment screw and
remove the inner frame.
1 Frame adjustment screw
2 Inner frame
b
Lay the fabric right side up on top of the outer frame.
c
Insert the inner frame making sure to align the inner
frame’s with the outer frame’s .
1 Inner frame’s
2 Outer frame’s
d
Slightly tighten the frame adjustment screw.
e
Gently smooth out the fabric. Make sure fabric is flat
and without wrinkles.
* After stretching the fabric, make sure the fabric is
taut.
* Make sure the inside and outside frames are even
before you start embroidering.
1 Outer frame
2 Inner frame
3 Fabric
Note
• If the fabric is not securely held in the embroidery
frame, the pattern will embroider out poorly. Insert
the fabric on a level surface, and gently stretch the
fabric taut in the frame.
• Embroidery frames with factory-coded stickers can
be used with the application (My Design Snap).
(page 179)
a
b
1 Factory-
coded
stickers
1
a
b
a
b
c
a
b
c
PREPARING THE FABRIC
128
f
Tighten the frame adjustment screw to keep the fabric
from loosening while stitching.
g
Return the frame adjustment screw to its initial
position.
Using the Embroidery Sheet
When you want to embroider the pattern in a particular
place, use the embroidery sheet with the frame.
a
With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the fabric you
want to embroider.
1 Embroidery pattern
2 Mark
b
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner frame. Align
the guide lines on the embroidery sheet with the mark
you made on the fabric.
1 Inner frame
2 Guide line
c
Gently stretch the fabric so there are no folds or
wrinkles, and press the inner frame into the outer
frame.
1 Inner frame
2 Outer frame
d
Remove the embroidery sheet.
Memo
• You can use the disc-shaped screw driver, when
you loosen or tighten the frame adjustment screw.
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY FRAME
129
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
a
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the
presser foot.
b
Align the embroidery frame guide with the right edge
of the embroidery frame holder.
1 Embroidery frame holder
2 Embroidery frame guide
c
Slide the embroidery frame into the holder, making
sure to align the embroidery frame’s with the
holder’s .
1 Arrow mark
d
Lower the frame-securing lever to be level with the
frame to secure the embroidery frame in the
embroidery frame holder.
1 Frame-securing lever
Removing the Embroidery Frame
a
Press (Presser foot lifter button) to raise the
presser foot.
b
Raise the frame-securing lever.
c
Pull the embroidery frame toward you.
ATTACHING THE EMBROIDERY
FRAME
Note
• Wind embroidery bobbin thread and insert the
bobbin before attaching the embroidery frame.
Check that there is enough thread in the bobbin.
• Make sure that the frame-securing lever is correctly
lowered after the embroidery frame has been
installed in the embroidery frame holder.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
130
The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the
embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be repositioned
for better placement on the garment, you can check the
layout before starting embroidery.
Checking the Needle Drop Point with the
Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer
a
Touch in the embroidery screen.
The LED pointer indicates the needle drop point.
Adjusting the LED Pointer
Adjust the LED pointer if it indicates a point different than
the actual needle drop point. Before adjusting the LED
pointer, mark the actual needle drop point on the fabric to
be embroidered, and attach the embroidery frame.
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Embroidery Foot with LED Pointer
Adjustment] in the embroidery setting screen.
d
Touch .
The Embroidery Foot “W+” with LED Pointer
Adjustment screen appears.
1 LED pointer adjustment
e
Use or to adjust the LED pointer so that it
indicates the actual needle drop point.
f
Touch to return to the original screen.
Adjusting the Brightness of the LED Pointer
a
Follow the steps from a to c of “Adjusting the LED
Pointer” on page 130 to display the embroidery foot
with LED pointer adjustment screen.
b
Use or to adjust the brightness of the LED
pointer.
c
Touch to return to the original screen.
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN
POSITION
Memo
• When the LED pointer turns on, the presser foot
height is automatically adjusted according to the
fabric thickness.
• appears when the embroidery foot “W+” with
LED pointer is attached to the machine.
• If is not displayed, you cannot use the LED
pointer.
• The LED pointer turns off automatically by lowering
the presser foot or returning to the previous page.
Note
• With spongy fabric, the position may not be
accurate due to the various depths of the fabric.
• With fabric that has a very uneven surface such as
quilting, the fabric thickness may not be correctly
measured. In this case, the pointer indication
should be used only as a reference.
Note
• As a default, appears gray. After the
embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer is attached
to the machine, the key becomes available and
settings can be specified.
Note
• The specified setting is saved in the machine’s
memory. This is useful for positioning during
continuous embroidering.
• For normal use, return the setting to [00].
Memo
• In order to more accurately check the needle drop
point, turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) to lower the needle.
1
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
131
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
Displaying a Background Image
Using a special application downloaded to a smartphone or
tablet, you can transfer a photo of the hooped fabric to be
embroidered to the machine to be used as a background
image.
The embroidery frame is displayed in the application. You can
see how the pattern will be arranged on the actual fabric.
For details, refer to “MY DESIGN SNAP APP” on page 179.
Displaying the Background Image on the
Screen of the Machine
a
Select the pattern. (page 105)
b
Photograph the fabric in the frame with the easy mode
of the application, and then transfer it to the machine.
For a detailed procedure, refer to the application.
c
Touch .
* Attach the frame used in the image before touching
.
The transferred background image appears on the
screen of the machine.
Calibrating the Position of the Background
Image
By calibrating the position of the background image
transferred to the machine, the pattern can be positioned
more accurately.
a
Select a pattern. (page 105)
b
Set the application to advanced mode, attach the
embroidery positioning sticker to the fabric in the
hoop, take the photo of the background, and with the
advanced mode of the application, transfer it to the
machine.
For a detailed procedure, refer to the application.
c
Touch .
* Attach the frame used in the image before touching
.
The carriage will move, and the LED pointer will turn
on.
d
Use to align the LED pointer with the center
of the larger circle in the embroidery positioning
sticker.
1 Center of the larger circle in the embroidery positioning
sticker
e
Touch .
The position of the background image is calibrated.
Note
• The wireless network settings must first be
specified on the machine. Refer to “WIRELESS
NETWORK CONNECTION FUNCTIONS” on
page 27.
• Embroidery frames with factory-coded stickers can
be used with the application (My Design Snap).
Memo
• To hide the background image, touch .
Touch to display the background image
again.
• The transferred background image includes the
embroidery frame display.
1 Factory-
coded
stickers
1
Memo
• The position can also be calibrated by lowering the
needle with the handwheel. This method enables
more accurate positioning. Slowly turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to check
the needle drop point. Then, turn the handwheel
away from you (clockwise) until the mark on the
handwheel is at the top. The carriage cannot move
if the mark on the handwheel is not at the top.
1
1 Mark
a
CONFIRMING THE PATTERN POSITION
132
Aligning the Embroidering Position
a
Calibrate the position of the background image.
(page 131)
b
Touch .
c
When the following message appears, touch .
d
Select the position to be set as the reference point.
e
Touch .
When the following message appears, touch .
f
Remove the embroidery positioning sticker, and then
start embroidering.
* To remove the embroidery positioning sticker more
easily, touch so that the embroidery frame
moves slightly forward and away from under the
needle. After the embroidery positioning sticker is
removed, touch .
Checking the Pattern Position
The carriage moves and shows the pattern position. Watch the
embroidery frame closely to make sure the pattern will be
embroidered in the right place.
a
Touch .
Memo
• The orientation of the pattern will change
depending on the orientation of the embroidery
positioning sticker.
THE 2-POINT EMBROIDERY POSITIONING FUNCTION
133
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
b
From , touch the key for the position that you
want to check.
1 Selected position
The carriage will move to the selected position on
the pattern.
c
Touch .
By using the 2-point embroidery positioning function with a
LED pointer, the embroidering position can easily be aligned.
This is useful when embroidering in an area where it is
necessary to align the pattern, as shown below.
a
Use a chalk pencil to mark the desired embroidering
position.
The line drawn for the reference direction should be
longer.
1 Chalk pencil mark
b
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
Memo
• To see the entire embroidering area, touch .
The carriage moves and shows the embroidery
area.
CAUTION
• Do not lower the needle when the embroidery
frame is moving. If the needle is down, it could
break and result in injury.
1
THE 2-POINT EMBROIDERY
POSITIONING FUNCTION
Memo
• If the desired position of the pattern can be clearly
established, such as when embroidering along a
pocket, it is not necessary to mark the position with
a chalk pencil.
Note
• When hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame,
make sure that the embroidery pattern will fit within
the embroidering area of the frame being used.
1 Embroidering area
2 Embroidery pattern size
3 Chalk pencil mark
a
a
b
c
THE 2-POINT EMBROIDERY POSITIONING FUNCTION
134
c
Select the pattern.
d
Touch to display the embroidery screen.
e
Touch and then touch .
1 Switch on/off the 2-point embroidery positioning
function with a LED pointer.
f
If a message appears, indicating that the move and
rotate settings will return to the original ones, touch
.
g
From the reference points shown in the screen, select
the point to be used for aligning the pattern.
For this example, select the point in the lower-left
corner of the pattern.
h
Touch .
i
Select the direction (from the reference point) to be
used as a reference for aligning the pattern.
For this example, select the arrow pointing to the right
as the reference direction.
1 Cancel the pattern alignment settings.
2 Return to the previous screen.
j
Touch .
k
Touch the positioning keys to move the embroidery
frame until the position of the LED pointer and the
center of the first mark are aligned.
To change the speed that the frame moves, use the
frame movement speed keys. If it is difficult to make a
precision alignment, touch a frame movement speed
key for a slower speed.
1 Positioning keys
2 Frame movement speed keys
3 Center of the first mark
4 Light of the LED pointer
Memo
• The LED pointer lights up to indicate the needle
drop point.
• When the LED pointer is turned on, the embroidery
foot height is automatically adjusted according to
the fabric thickness.
• If the surface of the fabric is too uneven or rough,
check and adjust the alignment of the light of the
LED pointer and the needle drop point before
starting to embroider.
1
2
1
1
2
c
d
THE 2-POINT EMBROIDERY POSITIONING FUNCTION
135
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
l
Touch .
m
Touch the positioning keys to move the embroidery
frame until the position of the LED pointer and the
center of the second mark are aligned.
To change the speed that the frame moves, use the
frame movement speed keys. If it is difficult to make a
precision alignment, touch a frame movement speed
key for a slower speed.
1 Positioning keys
2 Frame movement speed keys
3 Center of the second mark
4 Light of the LED pointer
n
Touch .
The pattern is repositioned.
o
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
Another example
By specifying an alignment point and direction,
embroidery patterns can be positioned and aligned for
various purposes.
In this example, a pattern is aligned at the left center of the
towel.
a
Use a chalk pencil to mark the desired embroidering
position.
The line drawn for the reference direction should be
longer.
1 Chalk pencil mark
Note
• If is displayed to the left of the positioning keys,
the LED pointer has shifted from its initial position.
Touch to adjust the position.
1
2
c
d
Note
• Set the position of the LED pointer to a position
that is not too close to the first reference point. If it
is too close, a message will appear, prompting you
to reposition it.
• In order to increase the accuracy of the pattern
alignment, align the position of the LED pointer
above the second mark (3) and as far away from
the center mark as possible.
a
THE 2-POINT EMBROIDERY POSITIONING FUNCTION
136
b
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
c
Select the pattern.
d
Touch to display the embroidery screen.
e
Touch and then touch .
1 Switch on/off the 2-point embroidery positioning
function with a LED pointer.
f
If a message appears, indicating that the move and
rotate settings will return to the original ones, touch
.
g
From the reference points shown in the screen, select
the point to be used for aligning the pattern.
For this example, select the point in the lower-center of
the pattern.
h
Touch .
i
Select the direction (from the reference point) to be
used as a reference for aligning the pattern.
For this example, select the arrow pointing upward as
the reference direction.
1 Cancel the pattern alignment settings.
2 Return to the previous screen.
j
Touch .
k
Touch the positioning keys to move the embroidery
frame until the position of the LED pointer and the
center of the first mark are aligned.
1 Positioning keys
2 Frame movement speed keys
3 Center of the first mark
4 Light of the LED pointer
1
2
1
1
2
c
d
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
137
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
l
Touch .
m
Touch the positioning keys to move the embroidery
frame until the position of the LED pointer and the
center of the second mark are aligned.
1 Positioning keys
2 Frame movement speed keys
3 Center of the second mark
4 Light of the LED pointer
n
Touch .
The pattern is repositioned.
o
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
Embroidering Attractive Finishes
Many factors are involved in achieving a beautiful embroidery
result. Using the appropriate stabilizer (page 126) and
hooping the fabric in the frame (page 127) are two important
factors mentioned earlier. Another important point is the
appropriateness of the needle and thread being used. See the
explanation of threads below. Included with this machine are
two bobbin cases. Follow the explanation below.
Bobbin case (recommended for sewing and for embroidering
with included 60 weight bobbin thread)
1 Standard bobbin case (green marking on the screw)
Standard bobbin case originally installed in the machine has a
green marking on the screw. We recommend using the
included embroidery bobbin thread with this bobbin case. Do
not adjust the tension screw on this bobbin case with the
green marked screw.
Bobbin case (for prewound or other embroidery bobbin
threads)
1 Bobbin case (no color on the screw)
The bobbin case with no color on the screw is set with tighter
tension for embroidery with different weights of bobbin
threads and a variety of embroidery techniques. This bobbin
case is identified with a dark colored mark on the inside of the
bobbin cavity. The tension screw on this case can be adjusted
if necessary. For details, refer to “Adjusting the Alternate
Bobbin Case (with No Color on the Screw)” on page 148.
1
2
c
d
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
Thread Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for
use with this machine.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread
intended for use with this machine.
Memo
• If you use threads other than those listed above,
the embroidery may not embroider out correctly.
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
138
Embroidery Needle Plate Cover
Under some conditions, based on the type of fabric,
stabilizer, or thread being used, there may be some
looping in the upper thread. In this case, attach the
included embroidery needle plate cover to the needle
plate. Attach the cover by inserting the two projections on
the underside of the cover into the notches on the needle
plate as shown below.
To remove the embroidery needle plate cover, place your
fingernail in the groove and lift the plate out.
Embroidering Patterns
a
Prepare embroidery threads of the colors shown on the
screen.
1 Embroidery color order
2 Cursor
b
Using the automatic needle threader, thread the
machine for the first color. (page 36)
c
Lower the presser foot, then press the “Start/Stop”
button to start embroidering.
When the first color is completely embroidered, the
machine will automatically trim the threads and stop.
The embroidery foot will then automatically be
raised.
On the embroidery color order display, the next
color will move to the top.
CAUTION
• When embroidering on large items (especially
jackets or quilts), do not let the fabric hang off
of the table. Otherwise, the embroidery unit
cannot move freely and the embroidery frame
may strike the needle, causing the needle to
break and possibly causing injury.
1 Groove
2 Projection
3 Notch
CAUTION
• Push the embroidery needle plate cover as far
as possible to attach it. If the embroidery
needle plate cover is not securely attached, it
may cause the needle to break and cause
injury.
a
b
c
Memo
• The [+] cursor moves over the pattern, showing
which part of the pattern is being embroidered.
2
1
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
139
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
d
Remove the upper thread for the first color from the
machine. Thread the machine with the next color.
e
Repeat the same steps for embroidering the remaining
colors.
1 Current stitch numbers/Total stitch numbers
2 Current time/Total time
3 Part of pattern to be embroidered next
4 Embroidered colors/Total colors
When the last color is embroidered, [Finished
embroidering] will appear on the display. Touch
, and the display will return to the original
screen.
Using Appliqués
When the color embroidering order display shows
[ (APPLIQUE MATERIAL)],
[ (APPLIQUE POSITION)] or
[ (APPLIQUE)], follow the procedure below.
Required materials
• Fabric for the appliqué piece
• Fabric for the appliqué base
• Stabilizer material
• Fabric glue or temporary spray adhesive
• Embroidery thread
1. Creating an Appliqué Piece
a
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side of the
fabric for the appliqué piece.
b
Sew the cutting line of the appliqué piece. Remove the
fabric for the appliqué piece from the embroidery
frame, and then carefully cut along the sewn cutting
line.
Memo
• If you want to get more attractive finishes, try the
procedures below;
- After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop” button
again to stop the machine.
- Trim the excess thread at the beginning of the
pattern. If the excess thread tail is under the
embroidery foot, raise the embroidery foot, then
trim the excess thread.
• If there is thread left over from the beginning of
embroidering, it may be embroidered over as you
continue embroidering the pattern, making it very
difficult to deal with the thread after the pattern is
finished. Trim the threads at the beginning of each
thread change.
3
4
2
1
Memo
• The thread trimming function is originally set to trim
excess thread jumps (threads linking parts of the
pattern, etc.). Depending on the type of thread and
fabric that are used, an end of upper thread may
remain on the surface of the fabric at the beginning
of the stitching. After embroidering is finished, cut
off this excess thread.
If the setting has been turned off, trim the excess
thread jumps using scissors after the pattern is
finished. Refer to page 150 for information on the
thread trimming function.
Note
• Refer to “Embroidery Design Guide” to review the
recommended method for built-in appliqué
patterns. Please visit https://s.brother/cmekb/.
Some appliqué patterns differ from the procedure
described in this manual.
• The correct names and numbers of the thread
colors to be used will not appear. Use the thread
colors depending on those in the appliqué pattern.
EMBROIDERING A PATTERN
140
1 Outline of appliqué
2 Fabric for appliqué piece
2. Sewing the Appliqué Position on the Base
Fabric
a
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side of the
fabric for the appliqué base.
b
Sew the appliqué position.
c
Remove the embroidery frame from the embroidery
unit.
3. Affixing the Appliqué Piece to the Base
Fabric
a
Lightly apply fabric glue or temporary spray adhesive
to the back of the appliqué piece, and then attach it to
the base fabric within the outline of the position sewn
in step
b of “2. Sewing the Appliqué Position on the
Base Fabric”.
b
After the appliqué piece is attached, attach the
embroidery frame to the machine.
Thread the machine with the embroidery thread, lower
the presser foot lever, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button to embroider the appliqué.
4. Embroidering the Remainder of the Pattern
a
Change the embroidery thread according to the
embroidery color order display, and then finish
embroidering the remainder of the pattern.
Note
• If the appliqué piece is cut out along the inside of
the cutting line, it may not be correctly attached to
the fabric. Therefore, carefully cut out the appliqué
piece along the cutting line.
• After cutting out the appliqué piece, carefully
remove the thread.
1 Position of appliqué
2 Base fabric
Note
• Do not remove the base fabric from the embroidery
frame until all embroidering is finished.
a
b
a
b
Note
• If the appliqué piece cannot be attached to the
base fabric with fabric glue or temporary spray
adhesive, securely baste it in place with basting
stitches.
• If thin fabric is used for the appliqué piece,
reinforce and secure it in place with an iron-on
adhesive sheet. An iron can be used to attach the
appliqué piece to the appliqué location.
Memo
• Since glue may become attached to the presser
foot, needle or needle plate, clean off any glue after
finishing embroidering the appliqué pattern.
• For best results, trim all excess threads each time
the thread color is changed.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
141
BASIC EMBROIDERY
4
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Runs
out of Thread During Embroidering
a
Redo the upper threading or replace the bobbin.
If the upper thread breaks, stop the machine, trim the
bobbin thread, and then rethread the machine.
If the bobbin thread is almost empty or broken, touch
of the displayed message, remove the embroidery
frame, and then replace the bobbin.
b
Touch .
c
Touch , , , or to move the needle
back the correct number of stitches before the area
where the thread broke, and then touch .
• Touch to restart from the beginning.
d
Lower the presser foot and press the “Start/Stop”
button to continue embroidering.
Resuming Embroidery after Turning off the
Power
The current color and stitch number are saved when
embroidery is stopped. The next time the machine is turned
on, you have the option to continue or delete the pattern.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE
EMBROIDERY PROCESS
Note
• If [Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor] in the settings
screen of the machine is set to [OFF], the message
shown above does not appear.
Memo
• If you cannot move back to the spot where the
thread broke, touch or
to select the color
and move to the beginning position of that color,
then use , , , or
to move ahead
to slightly before where the thread broke.
ADJUSTMENTS DURING THE EMBROIDERY PROCESS
142
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
143
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
Basting Embroidery
Before embroidering, basting stitches can be sewn along the
outline of the pattern. This is useful for embroidering fabric
that cannot have stabilizer material affixed with an iron or
adhesive. Basting stitches can be used to attach material that
cannot be hooped to stabilizer, making it possible to be
embroidered.
a
Touch .
b
Use and to specify the distance from the
pattern to the basting stitching.
c
Touch to return to the embroidering screen.
d
Touch , and then touch to select the
basting setting.
Basting is added to the beginning of the
embroidering order.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
f
When embroidering is finished, remove the basting
stitching.
Chapter 5
ADVANCED
EMBROIDERY
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING
FUNCTIONS
Note
• It is recommended to finish combining and editing
the pattern before selecting the basting setting. If
the pattern is edited after selecting the basting
setting, the basting and pattern may become
misaligned, and the basting under the pattern may
be difficult to remove after embroidering is
complete.
Memo
• The higher the setting, the farther the basting is
from the pattern.
• The setting remains selected even if the machine is
turned off.
Note
• When is touched, the pattern is moved to the
center. After selecting the basting setting, move the
pattern to the desired position.
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
144
Creating an Appliqué Piece
Creating an appliqué piece is convenient for fabrics that
cannot be embroidered or when you wish to attach an
appliqué to a garment.
Creating an Appliqué Piece
The following pattern will be used to create an appliqué
piece.
a
Select the pattern, and edit it if necessary.
b
Touch and then, touch .
c
Specify the distance between the pattern and the
appliqué outline, and then touch .
The pattern and appliqué outline are grouped.
Note
• Felt or denim fabrics are recommended to make
the appliqué piece. Depending on the pattern and
fabric used, lighter weight fabrics may cause the
stitching to appear smaller.
• For best results, be sure to use stabilizer material
for embroidering.
• When making appliqué pieces, do not use the
optional border embroidery frame. Depending on
the pattern density and fabric used, shrinkage of
the stitching may occur.
Note
• Finish combining and editing the pattern before
selecting the appliqué setting. If the pattern is
edited after selecting the appliqué setting, the
appliqué stitching and pattern may become
misaligned.
• Since an outline is added, the pattern for an
appliqué piece (when the appliqué setting is
selected) will be larger than the original pattern.
First, adjust the size and position of the pattern as
shown below.
1 Embroidering area
2 About 1cm (approx. 1/2 inch)
3 Pattern size
a
b
c
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
145
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
d
Touch .
The steps for creating the appliqué piece are added
to the embroidering order.
e
Fuse or stick a piece of stabilizer to the back of the felt
or denim fabric to be used as the appliqué piece.
f
Hoop the fabric for the appliqué piece in the
embroidery frame, attach the embroidery frame to the
machine, and then start embroidering.
g
After the pattern is embroidered, thread the machine
with the thread for the cutting line, and then sew the
cutting line (APPLIQUE MATERIAL).
h
Remove the fabric for the appliqué piece from the
embroidery frame, and then carefully cut along the
stitching. After cutting, carefully remove all of the
cutting line thread.
Memo
• Three steps are added to the embroidering order:
appliqué cutting line, position of pattern placement
on the stabilizer material, and appliqué stitching.
1 Cutting line for appliqué
2 Position of pattern placement on stabilizer
material
3 Appliqué stitching
• When setting the [Thread color] to [#123] (thread
number) in the settings screen, the following screen
is displayed.
Note
• An appliqué piece cannot be created if the pattern
is too large or too complicated or a combined
pattern is separated. Even if the selected pattern
fits within the embroidering area, the entire
appliqué pattern may exceed the embroidering
area when the outline is added. If an error message
appears, select a different pattern or edit it.
1
2
3
1 Cutting line for appliqué
Memo
• We recommend using thread for the cutting line
that is closest to the color of the fabric.
Note
• Depending on the pattern density and fabric used,
there may be shrinking of the pattern, or the
appliqué may be misaligned with the placement
line. We recommend cutting slightly outside of the
cutting line.
• When using patterns that are vertically and
horizontally symmetrical, use a chalk pencil to
indicate the pattern orientation before cutting it out.
• Carefully cut out the pattern on the outline you just
sewed. Do not cut inside the cutting line, otherwise
the appliqué fabric will not be caught by the
appliqué stitch.
a
VARIOUS EMBROIDERING FUNCTIONS
146
i
Use two layers of adhesive water soluble stabilizer
material with their sticky sides together, and then hoop
them in the embroidery frame.
j
Thread the machine with the thread for the outline,
and then sew the placement line for the appliqué
position (APPLIQUE POSITION).
1 Pattern placement line
k
Lightly apply glue or spray adhesive, and paste the
appliqué piece so that it aligns with the placement line.
l
With the machine threaded using the thread for the
outline from step
j, embroider the outline
(APPLIQUE).
m
After embroidering is finished, remove the stabilizer
material from the embroidery frame.
n
Use scissors to cut the excess water soluble stabilizer
from outside the appliqué outline.
o
Soak the appliqué piece in water to dissolve the water
soluble stabilizer.
p
Dry the appliqué piece, and then iron it if necessary.
Note
• If water soluble stabilizer is used, it is not
necessary to remove the stabilizer material after
sewing the appliqué outline. To reduce shrinkage
of the pattern, we recommend using water soluble
stabilizer.
• Put together two layers of water soluble stabilizer,
otherwise the stabilizer material may tear during
embroidering.
Note
• Before pasting the appliqué piece down, make sure
the appliqué piece is positioned correctly within the
placement line.
a
1 Outline of appliqué
piece
Memo
• The outline is sewn using satin stitching.
• Since glue may become attached to the presser
foot, needle or needle plate, clean off any glue after
finishing embroidering the appliqué pattern.
Note
• Do not apply a strong force when ironing,
otherwise the stitching may be damaged.
a
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
147
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
Adjusting Thread Tension
When embroidering, the thread tension should be set so that
the upper thread can slightly be seen on the wrong side of the
fabric.
The following screen appears when you touch .
Correct Thread Tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the fabric.
If the thread tension is not set correctly, the pattern will
not finish well. The fabric may pucker or the thread may
break.
Follow the operations described below to adjust thread
tension according to the situation.
Upper Thread Is Too Tight
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting in the
bobbin thread being visible from the right side of the
fabric.
Touch in to weaken the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will decrease.)
MAKING EMBROIDERY
ADJUSTMENTS
Memo
• If the thread tension is changed from the default
setting, the new setting will remain after turning the
machine off and on. This new setting will apply to
any selected design.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
Note
• If the thread tension setting is made extremely
loose, the machine may stop during embroidering.
This is not the sign of a malfunction. Increase the
thread tension slightly, and start embroidering
again.
Memo
• If the thread tension is changed from the default
setting, the new setting will remain after turning the
machine off and on. This new setting will apply to
any selected design.
Note
• If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too tight. In this case, refer to
“Setting the Bobbin” on page 34 and rethread the
bobbin thread.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
148
Upper Thread Is Too Loose
The tension of the upper thread is too loose, resulting in a
loose upper thread, loose thread locks, or loops appearing
on the right side of the fabric.
Touch in to tighten the upper thread
tension. (The tension number will increase.)
Adjusting Overall Upper Thread Tension
When embroidering, if the overall tension of the upper
thread is too tight or too loose, adjust it from the setting
screen. The selected setting will be applied to all patterns.
If an individual embroidery pattern needs additional fine
tuning, refer to “Adjusting Thread Tension” on page 147.
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Embroidery Tension] in the embroidery
settings screen.
d
Use to adjust the upper thread tension.
* : Tighten the upper thread tension.
* : Loosen the upper thread tension.
e
Touch .
Adjusting the Alternate Bobbin Case (with
No Color on the Screw)
When using the embroidery bobbin thread provided, please
be sure to choose the green marked bobbin case when
performing utility stitch sewing and embroidery functions.
When in the embroidery function mode, the alternate bobbin
case (with no color on the screw) should be selected when
substitute embroidery bobbin threads (other than what is
accompanied with your machine) are being used. The
alternate bobbin case (with no color on the screw) can be
easily adjusted when bobbin tension changes are required to
accommodate different bobbin threads. Refer to
“Embroidering Attractive Finishes” on page 137.
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery function, using
the alternate bobbin case (with no color on the screw), turn
the slotted screw (-) with a (small) screwdriver.
1 Do not turn a phillips screw (+).
2 Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
Correct Tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of fabric.
Bobbin Thread Is Too Loose
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of fabric.
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-) clockwise, being
careful not to over-tighten the screw, approximately 30-45
degrees to increase bobbin tension.
Note
• If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too loose. In this case, refer
to “Upper Threading” on page 36 and rethread the
upper thread.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
a
b
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
149
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
Bobbin Thread Is Too Tight
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be lifting/
looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the wrong side
of fabric.
If this occurs, turn the slotted screw (-) counterclockwise,
being careful not to over-loosen the screw, approximately
30-45 degrees to decrease bobbin tension.
Using the Automatic Thread Cutting
Function (End Color Trim)
The automatic thread cutting function will cut the
thread at the end of embroidering each color. This function is
initially turned ON. To turn this function OFF, touch and
then .
* This setting returns to its default when the
machine is turned off.
a
Touch .
b
Touch to turn off the automatic thread cutting
function.
The key will display as . When one color
thread is embroidered, the machine will stop without
cutting the thread.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the alternate bobbin case as this may
result in damage to the bobbin case, rendering
it unusable.
• If the slotted screw (-) is difficult to turn, do
not use force. Turning the screw too much or
providing force in either (rotational) direction
may cause damage to the bobbin case. Should
damage occur, the bobbin case may not
maintain proper tension.
Note
• When adjusting the alternate bobbin case, be sure
to remove the bobbin from the alternate bobbin
case.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
150
Using the Thread Trimming Function
(Jump Stitch Trim)
The thread trimming function will automatically trim
any excess thread jumps within the color. This function is
initially turned ON. To turn this function OFF, touch key
and then .
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
1 Jump stitch
a
Touch .
b
Touch to turn off the thread trimming
function.
The key will display as . The machine will
not trim the thread before moving to the next
stitching.
Selecting the Length Of Jump Stitch Not to
Trim
When the thread trimming function is turned on,
you can select the length of the jump stitch.
Select a setting from 5 mm to 50 mm in 5 mm increments.
* Your customized setting remains after turning the
machine off and on.
Touch or to select the length of jump stitch.
For example: Touch to select 25 mm (approx. 1
inch) and the machine will not trim a jump stitch of 25
mm or less before moving to the next stitching.
Adjusting the Embroidery Speed
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Max Embroidery Speed] in the embroidery
settings screen.
d
Use to change the maximum embroidery
speed.
e
Touch .
a
Note
• If design has many trims it is recommended to
select a higher jump stitch trim setting in order to
reduce the amount of excess tails on backside of
fabric.
• The higher number of the jump stitch length
selected, the fewer number of times the machine
will trim. In this case, more jump stitches remain on
the surface of the fabric.
Memo
• SPM is the number of stitches embroidered in one
minute.
• Decrease the embroidery speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy fabrics and
when using a specialty thread like a metallic thread.
• The setting specified before the main power is set
to OFF remains selected the next time that the
machine is turned ON.
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
151
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
Changing the Thread Color Display
You can display the name of the thread colors or embroidery
thread number.
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Thread color] in the embroidery settings
screen.
d
Use to display the name of the thread colors
or the embroidery thread number.
e
Use to select a thread brand.
f
Touch .
Aligning the Pattern and the Needle
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a pattern and the
needle
a
Mark the embroidery start position on the fabric, as
shown.
b
Touch .
c
Touch .
1 Start position
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The carriage moves so that the needle is
positioned correctly.
d
Touch .
e
Touch and then, touch .
f
Use to align the needle and the mark on the
fabric, and start embroidering the pattern.
Memo
• Colors on the screen may vary slightly from actual
spool colors.
• [Original], imported data remains the brand thread
created with the software, is set as a default.
1
MAKING EMBROIDERY ADJUSTMENTS
152
Embroidering Linked Characters
Follow the procedure described below to embroider linked
characters in a single row when the entire pattern extends
beyond the embroidery frame.
Example: Linking “FG” to the characters “ABCDE”
a
Select the character patterns for “ABCDE”.
b
Touch .
c
Touch .
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The carriage moves so that the needle is
positioned correctly. The machine is set to embroider
until the first stitch of the next character pattern (F).
d
Touch .
e
Touch .
f
Touch to turn off the thread cutting function
and then touch .
g
Press the “Start/Stop” button.
h
After the characters are embroidered, cut the threads
to a generous length, remove the embroidery frame,
reposition the fabric in the hoop so that the remaining
characters (“FG”) can be embroidered, and then attach
the embroidery frame.
1 End of the embroidering
i
As in step a, select the character patterns for “FG”.
j
Touch .
Note
• To cancel the starting point setting and return the
starting point to the center of the pattern, touch
or .
• Using can select a different starting point
for embroidering. However, the starting point
setting is canceled.
a
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
153
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
k
Touch .
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The carriage moves so that the needle is
positioned correctly.
l
Touch , then and use to align
the needle with the end of embroidering for the
previous pattern.
m
Touch .
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering the
remaining character patterns.
Saving Embroidery Patterns
a
Touch when the pattern you want to save is in
the embroidering screen.
b
When saving the embroidery pattern in a USB media,
insert the USB media into the USB port on the
machine.
c
Touch the desired destination to start saving.
1 Save to the machine’s memory.
2 Save to the USB media. The pattern is saved in a folder
labeled [bPocket].
3 Save to the wireless function pocket. For the detailed
procedure, refer to the manual for PE-DESIGN (version
11 or later).
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Saving…] screen is displayed. You will lose the
pattern you are saving.
Memo
• You can also save the pattern by touching in
the embroidery edit screen.
1 31
2
USING THE MEMORY FUNCTION
154
Retrieving Embroidery Patterns
a
When retrieving the embroidery patterns from a USB
flash drive, insert the USB flash drive into the USB port
on the machine.
To retrieve embroidery patterns via wireless network,
use PE-DESIGN (version 11 or later) or Design
Database Transfer to transfer the patterns in advance.
For details on transferring embroidery patterns, refer
to the manual for PE-DESIGN or Design Database
Transfer.
1 Retrieve from the machine’s memory.
2 Retrieve from a USB media.
3 Retrieve the pattern via the wireless network connection.
For detailed procedures, refer to PE-DESIGN manual
(Version 11 or later).
4 Retrieve from Artspira App. (pages 180)
b
Touch .
* Touch to delete the embroidery pattern.
2
1
3
4
Memo
• If the embroidery pattern to be retrieved is in a
folder of the USB media, touch the key for that
folder. Touch to return to the previous screen.
• You can save all or multiple data to the machine by
touching .
• To select multiple patterns, touch their thumbnails.
• : Select all patterns.
• : Deselect all patterns.
• : Save the selected patterns to the machine.
* To cancel the selection, touch again.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
155
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
Using a Frame Pattern To Make an Appliqué
Method 1
You can use framed patterns of the same size and shape to
create an appliqué. Embroider one pattern with a straight
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern. Embroider the
pattern onto the fabric for the appliqué piece, then cut
neatly around the outside of the shape.
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a onto the
base fabric.
c
Apply two-sided stabilizer material to the back of the
fabric for the appliqué piece created in step
a. Attach
the appliqué to the base fabric matching the shapes.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the same shape
as the appliqué. Embroider over the fabric for the
appliqué piece and base fabric from step c to create
the appliqué.
Method 2
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and embroider
the pattern onto the base fabric.
b
Place the fabric for the appliqué piece over the pattern
embroidered in step
a and embroider the same
pattern on the fabric for the appliqué piece.
* Be sure that the fabric for the appliqué piece
completely covers the stitched line.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
Note
• If you change the size or position of the patterns when
making an appliqué, make a note of the size and the
location.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
156
c
Remove the embroidery frame from the embroidery
unit, and cut around the outside of the stitches of the
fabric for the appliqué piece. And then, reattach the
embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the same shape
as the appliqué and embroider the satin stitch pattern
to create an appliqué.
Embroidering Couching Patterns
Couching patterns can be embroidered using yarn.
Preparing for Embroidery Couching
a
Turn off the machine.
Attach the embroidery unit.
b
Install a bobbin wound with embroidery bobbin
thread.
c
Turn on the machine.
d
Touch , and then touch .
Note
• Do not remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame to cut it. Also, do not pull or push on the
fabric. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
frame.
CAUTION
• When using yarn, we recommend selecting
yarn of weight 4 (MEDIUM ). Medium
yarn is often referred to as worsted weight, 20
knitted stitches per 10 cm, or 9-11 wraps per
inch. The diameter of the yarn is
approximately 2-3 mm (approx. 1/12-1/8
inch). If the yarn is extremely thin or thick, has
an unusual shape (flat or furry), or more than 2
yarns, the best finishing results may not be
achieved, or injuries or damage may result.
Note
• If the spool stand in the procedure is not included
with your machine, purchase the optional spool
stand from your Brother authorized dealer or our
web site https://s.brother/coeka/
.
• Before embroidering your project, do trial
embroidery on a scrap piece of fabric that is the
same as that used in your project.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
157
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
e
Select the desired pattern from the desired category.
And then touch .
1 Couching patterns
2 Fill couching embroidery font
f
Touch to lock all keys and buttons, and then
raise the presser foot lever.
g
Attach embroidery couching foot “Y”.
* Attach the embroidery couching foot through the
front of the buttonhole lever.
1 buttonhole lever
h
Rotate the handwheel and check that the needle is in
the left half of the hole in embroidery couching foot
“Y”.
If the needle is not in the left half, use the multi-purpose
screwdriver to turn the screw of embroidery couching
foot “Y” to adjust the position of the embroidery foot.
Turn the screw toward you to move the embroidery foot
to the right. Turn the screw toward the back to move the
embroidery foot to the left.
After making adjustments, rotate the handwheel and
check that the needle does not touch the presser foot.
i
Attach the spool stand (included with some models) to
the machine.
At this time, do not raise the telescopic thread guide
shaft.
* Refer to “Using the Spool Stand” on page 41.
j
Insert the yarn guide for embroidery couching into the
slot on the top left of the machine.
k
Pass the yarn through the telescopic thread guide and
the yarn guide (1) to (2).
CAUTION
• When using the embroidery couching foot
“Y”, make sure the machine is in embroidery
mode. Otherwise, the needle will strike the
embroidery couching foot, causing the needle
to break and possibly causing injury.
1 2
a
Note
• Pull off an appropriate amount of yarn from the ball
so that the yarn does not become taut.
• Make sure that the yarn does not become
entangled as you work.
1
2
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
158
l
Pass the yarn through the guide on embroidery
couching foot “Y”.
m
Thread the yarn through embroidery couching foot
“Y”.
Pass the yarn through the loop in the yarn threader,
and then pass the threader from top to bottom through
the hole in embroidery couching foot “Y”. Pull the
yarn to the front of the machine.
n
Touch to unlock all keys and buttons.
o
Thread the machine with the upper thread.
p
Press (Presser foot lifter button) twice to raise the
presser foot and then attach the embroidery frame to
the embroidery unit.
Embroidering a Couching Pattern
a
Touch .
b
Make sure that about 20 cm (approx. 8 inches) of yarn
is pulled to the front of the machine.
c
While holding the yarn in your hand in front of you,
press the “Start/Stop” button.
d
After embroidering several stitches, release the yarn.
When embroidering is finished, the machine will
automatically trim the threads and stop.
e
Cut the yarn, leaving about 20 cm (approx. 8 inches).
f
Punch a hole through the fabric with an awl or tapestry
needle and then use the yarn threader to pull the
excess yarn to the wrong side of the fabric.
g
Tie the end of the yarn so it cannot be pulled out, and
then use scissors to cut off any excess yarn.
Memo
• Place a sheet of paper under the presser foot to
smoothly pass the yarn threader through the hole in
embroidery couching foot “Y”.
Note
• Do not use the spool stand for upper thread.
Otherwise thread may tangle with yarn.
Memo
• For best results, use an upper thread that is the
same color as the yarn.
CAUTION
• Pulling the yarn upwards may cause it to catch
on the needle, causing it to break. Be careful
not to allow the yarn to catch on the needle.
Note
• Before embroidering, make sure that there is
enough yarn, upper thread and bobbin thread.
• Make sure that the yarn passes smoothly through
the guides. Unravel as much yarn from the ball as
necessary so that the yarn does not become taut.
• Use yarn that has no knots.
Memo
• When using a high-density yarn, the upper thread
tension may be disturbed. If this happens, it is
possible to improve it by raising the [Embroidery
Foot Height] by about 1 mm on the settings screen.
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
159
ADVANCED EMBROIDERY
5
Creating Stippling, Echo Quilting, or
Decorative Fill Patterns around a Design
Stippling, echo quilting, and decorative fill patterns can be
created around the machine’s built-in patterns or original
embroidery data without using My Design Center.
a
Select the pattern that stippling will be added around.
* To select multiple patterns, refer to “Selecting
Multiple Patterns at the Same Time” on page 110.
b
Touch in the embroidery edit screen.
Stippling is automatically applied around the
selected pattern.
c
After specifying the stitch settings for the stippling,
touch , and then touch .
1 The stippling is added within the area of the selected
frame size. If the pattern is larger than the selected frame
size, the area indicating the frame size will appear in
gray, and stippling will not be added.
2 Specify the distance from the outline of the pattern to the
stippling.
3 Specify the spacing for the stippling.
* Touch in the stippling settings screen to create
an echo quilting pattern.
* Touch in the stippling settings screen to create
a decorative fill pattern.
1 Echo quilting pattern
2 Decorative fill pattern
Memo
• If this simple stippling operation is used with
batting sandwiched between two layers of fabric,
the embroidery pattern and stippling may become
misaligned.
Stippling can be added in My Design Center after
the pattern is embroidered. For details, refer to
“Decorative Stitching around a Pattern in
Embroidery (a Quilting Function)” on page 176.
12
1
2
3
EMBROIDERY APPLICATIONS
160
Embroidering Split Embroidery Patterns
Split embroidery patterns created with PE-DESIGN Ver. 7 or
later can be embroidered. With split embroidery patterns,
embroidery patterns larger than the embroidery frame are
divided into multiple sections, which combine to create a
single pattern after each section is embroidered.
For details on creating split embroidery patterns and for more
detailed embroidery instructions, refer to the Instruction
manual included with PE-DESIGN Ver. 7 or later.
a
Insert the USB media containing the created split
embroidery pattern, and then select the split
embroidery pattern to be embroidered. (page 154)
b
Select section to be embroidered.
c
Touch .
d
If necessary, touch and edit the pattern.
Touch to display the embroidery screen.
e
Embroider the pattern section.
f
When embroidering is finished, the following screen
appears. Touch .
A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
g
Repeat steps b through f to embroider the
remaining sections of the pattern.
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER
161
With My Design Center, you can use the functions listed
below:
• Hand-drawn functions - creating embroidery patterns
by drawing on the LCD screen
• Loading functions - creating embroidery patterns by
transferring data from the application or USB media.
You can also combine patterns that you have created with
the machine’s built-in patterns.
Start My Design Center by touching in the home
page screen or touching in the embroidery pattern
selection screen.
1 Pattern drawing area
2 Pattern preview area
Chapter 6
MY DESIGN CENTER
ABOUT MY DESIGN CENTER PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
Memo
• The actual dimension of the pattern area is the size
of the embroidery frame, which is shown in the
pattern preview area. The pattern you drew may be
bigger than you expected. Please resize the pattern
after converting the design to the embroidery
pattern.
• When the pattern is enlarged so that only a part of
it appears in the pattern drawing area, the entire
pattern is displayed in the pattern preview area.
The red frame in the pattern preview area indicates
the part of the pattern displayed in the pattern
drawing area. Move the red frame in the pattern
preview area with the touch pen (stylus) or your
finger to display the corresponding area in the
pattern drawing area.
1
2
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
162
Key Functions
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
3 Magnify the pattern. 164
Magnify key
4 Load the fabric as the
background or the picture as the
reference when creating the
pattern. You can load the image
file from the application or USB
media.
169
Load key
5 Load a line drawing, then edit and
convert it to embroidery data. You
can load a line drawing from the
application or USB media to
create the embroidery design.
170
Line design key
6 Load an image, then edit and
convert it to embroidery data. You
can load an image from the
application or USB media to
create the embroidery design.
172
Image design
key
7 Draw lines and set the color. You
can select the line type, stitch
type and color as you need.
Touch to pick up the color,
line type and stitch type from a
line in the pattern within the
pattern drawing area. The picked
up color is shown as the currently
selected line color beside the
button and as the selected color
in the Line Property screen.
163
Line tool key
8 Paint with brush and set the color.
You can select the brush type, fill
type and color as you need.
Painted lines and regions will be
converted to the pattern to be
embroidered with fill stitch.
Touch to pick up the color,
brush type and fill type from a
region in the pattern within the
pattern drawing area. The picked
up color is shown as the currently
selected region color in the color
bar and the Region Property
screen.
164
Brush tool key
3
L
5 6
G
8
0
B
D
K J I H
F
4
7
9
A
C
E
9 Erase lines and shapes that have
been drawn. You can select the
size/shape of the eraser.
166
Erase key
0 Select the stamp shape for
pattern drawing.
165
Stamp key
A Select a section for moving,
copying, deleting, changing size
and rotating lines and shapes that
have been drawn.
166
Select key
B Cut out the selected section. —
Cut key
C Change the size of the selected
section.
174
Size key
D Rotate the selected section. —
Rotate key
E Duplicate the selected section.
The temporarily positioned
section can immediately be
rotated, enlarged, reduced or
moved.
—
Duplicate key
F Paste in the selected section
duplicated with the duplicate key
or a selected section using the
cut key.
—
Paste key
G Proceed to the stitch settings
screen.
—
Next key
H Recall image data created with
My Design Center from the
machine’s memory or the USB
media.
—
Recall key
I Store the pattern being created to
the machine’s memory or the
USB media.
—
Memory key
J Undo the last operation that was
performed and return to the
previous state. Each touch of this
key will undo one operation.
—
Undo key
K Clear all the lines and shapes and
start from the beginning. The
background image is also
cleared.
—
All Clear key
L Exit from My Design Center. All
lines and shaped are erased
when you touch this key.
—
Cancel key
No.
Display
Explanation Page
Name
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
163
Before Creating Designs
The pattern preview displays the design smaller than the
actual size. You can view the actual pattern size by setting the
[Embroidery Frame Display].
With [Embroidery Frame Display] in the settings screen, the
embroidery frame and grid can be specified separately.
a
Touch .
The settings screen appears.
b
Touch .
The embroidery settings screen appears.
c
Display [Embroidery Frame Display] in the embroidery
settings screen.
d
Select the embroidery frame display.
1 Embroidery frame types
2 Grid types
Drawing Lines
a
Touch and draw lines.
Setting the Line Types, Stitch Types and Colors
You can set or change the line types, stitch types and
colors anytime. You can also specify the line types, stitch
types and colors before drawing lines.
a
Touch to set the line types, stitch types and
colors.
The settings screen appears.
1 Line types
2 Stitch types
3 Line color selection: touch the color palette to activate
the drawing pen color.
Line types
Memo
• When is touched, all regions will be displayed
in the background to clarify the drawing lines on
the screen.
1
2
Freehand line with the end open.
Freehand line closing the end automatically.
Straight line with one stroke
Straight line changing directions to the point
you select. If the end point is created near the
start point, a closed object will be created.
1
3
2
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
164
Stitch types
b
Touch to return to the pattern drawing screen.
You can check the selected stitch type and color.
1 Color bar
2 Stitch type
c
Touch then touch on the line to change its color.
The connected line will be changed to the selected
color.
Drawing Regions
a
Touch and draw with brush.
Setting the Brush Types, Fill Patterns and Fill
Colors
a
Touch to set the brush types, fill patterns and fill
colors.
The setting screen appears.
1 Brush types
2 Fill stitch types
3 Fill color selection: touch the color palette to activate the
paint brush color.
Brush shapes/sizes
Fill stitch types
Zigzag stitch
Running stitch
Triple stitch
Candlewicking stitch
Chain stitch
E stitch
V stitch
Select motif stitches
Displays motif stitch selection screen, where
can be touched to select a pattern.
Line without stitch for creating a region.
Created region will be defined by the gray line.
Memo
• Touch to magnify the image when you cannot
touch on the line correctly.
• Touch , and then select a color within the
pattern drawing area to apply the same color to
other lines or parts of the pattern.
1 Use to select the line color.
2 Touch for changing the line color, and then
select the pattern to be changed.
1
2
1
2
Square brush
Round brush
Fill stitch pattern
Stippling pattern
1
3
2
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
165
Select when you don’t want fill stitch.
b
Touch to return to the pattern drawing screen.
The color bar on the brush tool key is changed to the
selected color. If a stippling pattern or decorative fill
pattern has been selected, the stitch pattern is
displayed.
1 Color bar
c
Touch and touch on the brush line to change
color and fill stitch type. You can also set the fill color,
stitch type and fill pattern of a closed area made of the
lines and brush lines.
Using the Stamp Key
a
Touch .
b
Select a stamp type and stamp shape.
1 Stamp shapes
2 Stamp types
3 Saved outlines
4 Frame embroidering areas
Stamp shapes
Stamp types (Only for Basic shapes)
* Select the outline ( ), fill stitch ( ), or outline
and fill stitch ( ) of a basic shape.
Select decorative fill patterns
Displays a fill pattern selection screen, where
can be touched to select a pattern.
Memo
• Touch to magnify the image when you cannot
touch on the fill correctly.
• Touch , and then select a pattern color in the
pattern drawing area to apply that fill color and
stitch type to other patterns.
1 Use to select the fill color.
2 Touch for changing the fill color and stitch
type, and then select the pattern to be changed.
1
1
2
Basic shapes
Closed shapes
Open shapes
Outline
Fill stitch
Outline and fill stitch
3
2
4
1
PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN
166
Saved outlines
Frame embroidering areas
* Touch to return to the pattern drawing
screen.
c
Touch to set the selected stamp.
The pattern drawing screen appears.
* You can change size of, rotate or move the shape
right after you create it by touching or .
Using the Erase Key
a
Touch .
b
Select the shape of the eraser.
The pattern drawing screen appears.
c
Drag along the area or line that you want to erase
while the key appears as .
Using the Select Key
You can select the part of the design to move and/or edit.
Some keys are available only after you select the part.
a
Touch .
b
Select the area you want to edit.
* Drag to create the red box around your selected area
to be edited.
c
Edit the design with available keys. (Refer to “Key
Functions” on page 162 for the details of each key
function.)
d
Touch , and then specify the stitch setting.
Embroidery pattern outlines can be registered
as stamp shapes. When registering stamp
shapes, select from the last 20 embroidery
patterns used. If more than 20 shapes are
registered, the oldest one is automatically
erased. For details on registering a stamp
shape, refer to “Decorative Stitching around a
Pattern in Embroidery (a Quilting Function)” on
page 176.
Select an embroidering area in order to
arrange the pattern to fit an embroidery frame.
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
167
After creating the pattern drawing data (.pm9) in the
drawing screen (page 161), you will have an opportunity
to:
• Check and change the stitch settings for each line
and region.
• Save the pattern drawing data (.pm9).
• Convert the data to an embroidery pattern (.phx),
proceed to the embroidery edit screen, and/or save
the embroidery pattern.
Specifying Individual Stitch Settings
Select a pattern in the stitch settings screen to specify its line
and region stitch settings. If multiple patterns are selected, the
settings are applied to those patterns.
Line Settings
1 Select the line to be changed.
2 Shows the stitch type and color for the selected line.
3 Shows the stitch settings for the selected line.
Line stitch settings
Select the type of stitching you want applied to your line
art.
Zigzag stitch
Running stitch /Triple stitch
* Both includes an under sewing.
Candlewicking Stitch
Chain stitch
E stitch
V stitch
Motif stitch
Region Settings
1 Select the region to be changed.
2 Shows the stitch type and color for the selected region.
3 Shows the stitch settings for the selected region.
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
[Zigzag
width]
Specifies the width of the stitch.
[Density]
Specifies the density of the stitch.
[Run Pitch]
Specifies the length of the stitch.
2
3
1
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the stitch.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the stitch.
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the stitch.
[Thickness]
Sets repeated embroidering at the same
part.
[Stitch
width]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the E stitch.
[Thickness]
Sets repeated embroidering at the same
part.
[Flip]
Specifies if the decorative line shows up
inside or outside.
[Stitch
width]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the V stitch.
[Thickness]
Sets repeated embroidering at the same
part.
[Flip]
Specifies if the decorative line shows up
inside or outside.
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing of the motif stitch.
[Flip]
Specifies if the decorative line shows up
inside or outside.
2
3
1
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
168
Fill stitch settings
Stippling stitch settings
Decorative fill stitch settings
a
Use to select the line or region to be changed.
Each touch of moves the highlighting of the
selected pattern in order.
b
Select the setting to be changed, and then change the
setting in the screen that appears. (In this example, the
embroidering direction will be changed.)
The setting screen appears.
c
Touch , and then use to change the
direction.
d
Touch to apply the setting.
* appears on the tab for settings that were
changed.
* Change other settings in the same way.
Specifying Global Stitch Settings
The same stitch settings can be changed at the same time for
multiple patterns of the same type.
a
Use
to select the stitch whose settings are to
be changed, and then touch .
The same stitch type lines or regions will be selected
at the same time.
b
Follow steps b through d in “Specifying Individual
Stitch Settings” on page 167 to change the settings.
c
Touch to create the embroidery pattern.
[Direction]
Specifies the embroidering direction. Select
to change to the desired direction of
fill stitch.
[Density]
Specifies the stitch density of fill stitch.
[Pull
compensation]
Specifies to correct the shrinkage of the
pattern by slightly shortening or lengthening
the stitching. Change the setting after you
test embroider the pattern and can check the
shrinkage.
[Under
sewing]
Select if you need or do not need the under
sewing for the stabilized fabric.
[Run Pitch]
Specifies the length of a stitch of the
stippling stitch.
[Spacing]
Specifies the spacing between the stitches
when embroidering the stippling stitch.
[Distance] Specifies the offset from the pattern outline.
[Size]
Increases/reduces the size of the pattern.
[Direction]
Specifies the rotation angle of the pattern.
[Outline]
Select whether [ON] or [OFF] the outline is
also converted to embroidery data. If [ON] is
selected, the number of thread jumps can be
reduced.
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN
169
When the following message appears, touch .
d
Touch to display the pattern editing screen.
When the following message appears, touch .
1 : Check an enlarged view of the pattern.
2 : Save the embroidery data.
Loading the Background Image
Prepare the data file of your favorite picture so that you can
create an embroidery pattern. Load the image file from the
application “MY DESIGN SNAP APP” on page 179 or a USB
media.
a
Touch .
b
Select the device you saved the data to.
c
Select the data, and then touch .
1
2
LINE CONVERSION
170
d
The selected image is displayed transparently in the
pattern drawing area.
e
Using the included touch pen (stylus), touch , and
then draw lines to trace the image.
* For details on drawing lines, refer to “Drawing
Lines” on page 163.
1 Transparency adjustment
* Touch or to adjust the transparency of the
background.
Each touch of lightens the background, making
the line pattern darker. Each touch of darkens
the background, making the line pattern lighter.
f
After editing the pattern, touch to specify the
settings for pattern.
g
Touch to create the embroidery pattern.
Custom patterns can be created from drawings. You can
create patterns by loading an image on the application
“MY DESIGN SNAP APP” on page 179 or a USB media.
Recommended line drawings for Line Conversion
• Line drawings must be drawn clearly using lines with
approximately 1 mm thickness.
• Line drawings should be drawn in a strong contrast.
• If the lines are too short or gathered too densely, they
will not be loaded correctly.
Create a Pattern with Line Conversion
a
Touch .
The image display screen appears.
1
LINE CONVERSION
Note
• For details on creating patterns using color
illustrations, refer to “ILLUSTRATION
CONVERSION” on page 172.
• If you cannot convert the drawings as expected,
you can edit the design in My Design Center. Refer
to “PATTERN DRAWING SCREEN” on page 161.
• Line drawings are converted without recognizing
the thickness of lines. If you want to change the
thickness of lines, specify in the settings screen.
Refer to “STITCH SETTINGS SCREEN” on
page 167.
• Line drawings are converted as black lines. If you
want to change the colors, specify in My Design
Center. Refer to “Drawing Lines” on page 163.
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
LINE CONVERSION
171
b
Select the device you saved the data to.
c
Select the data, and then touch .
d
When loading is finished, specify the [Gray-Scale
Detection level] on the screen if necessary.
The [Gray-Scale Detection level] can change the black
and white threshold for the image.
* If you do not know how the settings should be
changed, first continue the operation without
specifying settings and check the results.
* To stop loading and return to the screen in step
b ,
touch . The loaded image will be deleted
when you return to the previous screen.
e
Move to frame the image for the pattern.
f
Touch .
The screen for confirming the converted image
appears.
g
In the screen for confirming the converted image, you
can adjust the [Gray-Scale Detection level] again, if
necessary.
1 The settings for the lines to be embroidered appear.
* If you do not know how the settings should be
changed, first continue the operation without
specifying settings and check the results.
* : Enlarge the image.
* : Display the image before being
converted. Compare the images before and after
being converted, and then change the settings if
necessary.
* : Return to the previous screen.
After changes to the settings for [Gray-Scale
Detection level] are applied, changes to
. Touch to check that the image is as
desired.
h
Touch .
The pattern drawing screen appears.
i
If necessary, edit the loaded image.
* After the loaded image is converted to stitching, it
appears as a background in the pattern drawing
screen. Use gauge 1 to adjust the transparency of
the background. Each touch of lightens the
background, making the line pattern darker. Each
touch of darkens the background, making the
line pattern lighter.
1
1
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION
172
Custom patterns can be created from color illustrations.
You can create patterns by loading an image on the
application “MY DESIGN SNAP APP” on page 179 or a
USB media.
Recommended illustrations for Illustration Conversion
• Illustrations that are clearly drawn, with no
gradation, fading or blurriness.
• Illustrations that are at least a 5 mm square
• Illustrations that are extremely simple images
Create a Pattern with Illustration Conversion
a
Touch .
The image display screen appears.
b
Select the device you saved the data to.
c
Select the data, and then touch .
d
When loading is finished, specify the necessary settings
in the loaded image confirmation screen.
Change the settings to adjust the image so it can easily
be converted to the desired pattern.
* To stop loading and return to the screen in step
b,
touch .
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION
1 [Max. Number of
Colors]
The number of colors in an image will
be reduced less than the number
specified here, and then the outline
will be extracted.
2 [Remove Background] Select whether or not the
background color will be included as
one of the colors.
3 [Line] Select whether or not the outline will
be detected as a line. A thick outline
can also be detected as a region.
When detected as a line, the line
thickness and color can be specified.
3
2
1
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
ILLUSTRATION CONVERSION
173
e
Move to frame the image for the pattern.
f
Touch .
The screen for confirming the converted image
appears.
g
In the screen for confirming the converted image,
adjust the image as necessary as in step
d.
* : Enlarge the image.
* : Display the image before being
converted. Compare the images before and after
being converted, and then change the settings if
necessary.
* : Return to the previous screen.
After changes to the settings described above have
been applied, changes to . Touch
to check that the image is as desired.
h
Touch .
The pattern drawing screen appears.
i
If necessary, edit the loaded image.
* After the loaded image is converted to stitching, it
appears as a background in the pattern drawing
screen. Use gauge 1 to adjust the transparency of
the background. Each touch of lightens the
background, making the illustration pattern darker.
Each touch of darkens the background, making
the illustration pattern lighter.
Memo
• Touch to detect the outline.
Line thickness can be specified from 1.0 mm
(approx. 1/16 inch) to 5.0 mm (approx. 3/16 inch).
• Touch to select the outline color. Select by
touching the color, or moving icon using
in the color selection screen.
1
STIPPLING
174
Basic Stippling with My Design Center
Create a stippling design with the basic procedure.
Example:
a
Touch .
b
Select the square shape, and then touch .
c
Touch .
d
Select the heart shape, and then touch .
e
Touch .
STIPPLING
Note
• You can load a line drawing to create a stippling
stitch or use image design function of a fabric
pattern and incorporate the stippling stitch.
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
STIPPLING
175
f
Touch until the heart shape fits in the square
shape, and then touch .
g
Touch , and then touch .
h
Touch , and then select the stitch color. Touch
after setting the color.
i
Select the region you want to set stippling effect.
1 Select this region.
j
Touch .
k
Adjust the stippling stitch settings to create the desired
effect, and then touch .
* For details, refer to “Specifying Individual Stitch
Settings” on page 167.
When the following message appears, touch .
1
STIPPLING
176
l
Touch to convert into embroidery.
When the following message appears, touch .
m
Follow the procedure described on “EDITING
PATTERNS” on page 111 to edit the pattern as desired.
Decorative Stitching around a Pattern in
Embroidery (a Quilting Function)
A quilt can be created with stippling stitch around an
embroidery pattern.
a
Touch in the home page screen and select the
pattern that decorative stitching will be added around,
and then touch in the embroidery edit screen.
The outline of the pattern is displayed.
b
Set the distance and touch .
A message appears, and the pattern outline is
registered as a stamp shape in My Design Center.
Touch .
Memo
• For best results, reduce the embroidery speed.
(page 22)
• For best results, hoop the stabilizer and fabric and
embroider the design prior to adding the batting
and backing under the hoop for quilting.
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
STIPPLING
177
c
Touch to continue to the embroidery screen,
and then embroider the pattern at the center.
d
Remove the embroidery frame from the carriage.
e
Photograph the embroidery frame with the application.
f
Attach the embroidery frame to the carriage again.
g
Place the batting and bottom layer of fabric under the
embroidery frame.
h
Touch in the home page screen to start My
Design Center.
i
Touch to load the embroidered fabric. Refer
to “Loading the Background Image” on page 169 for
details.
j
Touch , touch to recall the stamp shape
registered in step
b, and then arrange it over the
loaded pattern.
k
Use a stamp or rectangular frame to determine the
region to be stitched.
l
Touch to select the pattern and color of the
decorative stitching.
m
Touch , and then fill the region to be stitched
outside of the stamp shape outline.
Note
• If the region is to be drawn by hand, be sure to
draw a completely closed shape. If the region is not
closed, it will not be correctly closed with any of
the fill stitches.
MY STITCH MONITOR APP
178
n
If you select the stamp shapes to determine the region
on step
k, touch for the line tool keys to select
. Touch , then select the frame outline, and
then touch .
* Stitch settings can be adjusted in the stitch settings
screen. For details, refer to “STITCH SETTINGS
SCREEN” on page 167.
o
Specify the stitch spacing and length in the stitch
settings screen, and then touch .
Check the pattern, and then touch .
p
Embroider the stippling stitch around the embroidery
pattern.
With the My Stitch Monitor App installed on your smart
device and the machine and smart device connected to the
same wireless network, you can check the operating status of
the machine. In addition, you can receive notifications when
the machine stops.
Installing the App
a
Use your smart device to scan the appropriate QR
code below to visit Google Play™ or the App Store.
Android™: https://s.brother/msmagi
iOS: https://s.brother/msmggi
b
Install [My Stitch Monitor].
MY STITCH MONITOR APP
My Stitch Monitor
Memo
• To download and install the app, you can also
search for [My Stitch Monitor] in Google Play™ or
the App Store.
• For more information on how to use this
application, visit the following web site.
https://s.brother/cpeae/
MY DESIGN CENTER
6
MY DESIGN SNAP APP
179
Monitoring
a
Connect the machine to your wireless network.
* Refer to “WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION
FUNCTIONS” on page 27.
b
Confirm that your smart device and your machine are
connected to the same network.
c
Tap the icon for [My Stitch Monitor] on the smart
device to start the app.
d
Follow the instructions that appear in the app to
connect the app to your machine.
* Select the name that appears beside [Machine
name] in the settings screen on your machine.
The machine can now be monitored.
With My Design Snap app, you can position your embroidery
designs on the fabric, by capturing image of the hooped fabric
and sending the image to your machine.
Installing the My Design Snap App
a
Use your smart device to scan the appropriate QR
code below to visit Google Play™ or the App Store.
Android™: https://s.brother/mdsgfi
iOS: https://s.brother/mdsafi
b
Install [My Design Snap].
Memo
• The app will be updated from time to time. The
following descriptions may differ from the actual
screens and operations.
MY DESIGN SNAP APP
My Design Snap
Memo
• To download and install the app, you can also
search for [My Design Snap] in Google Play™ or
the App Store.
• For more information on how to use this
application, visit the following web site.
https://s.brother/cpeae/
ARTSPIRA APP COMPATIBLE
180
Functions have been added for the Artspira App. With
these functions, you can transfer content published on the
app to the embroidery machine and enjoy creating original
works using the functions on the app.
For more information about the app, refer to the official
website. For details on how to operate the embroidery
machine using the app, see the Artspira Quick Guide on
Artspira support page (https://s.brother/csyai/
).
ARTSPIRA APP COMPATIBLE
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
181
APPENDIX
7
Cleaning the LCD
If the surface of the LCD is dirty, lightly wipe it with a soft dry
cloth.
Cleaning the machine surface
When wiping dirt off the machine, firmly wring a soft cloth
soaked in (lukewarm) water.
After cleaning the machine, dry it with a soft, dry cloth.
Restrictions on Oiling
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must not be
oiled by the user. This machine was manufactured with the
necessary amount of oil applied to ensure correct operation,
making periodic oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the handwheel or
an unusual noise, immediately stop using the machine, and
contact your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
Precautions on Storing the Machine
Do not store the machine in any of the locations described
below, otherwise damage to the machine may result, for
example, rust caused by condensation.
* Exposed to extremely high temperatures
* Exposed to extremely low temperatures
* Exposed to extreme temperature changes
* Exposed to high humidity or steam
* Near a flame, heater or air conditioner
* Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight
* Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments
Cleaning the Race
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Turn the main power to OFF, and then unplug the
machine.
c
Remove the needle and presser foot (page 42,
page 45).
d
Remove the flat bed attachment or the embroidery unit
if either is attached.
e
Insert the multi-purpose screwdriver into the hole, and
tilt the multi-purpose screwdriver to the left and then
to the back, as shown in the illustration.
f
Slide out the needle plate with your right hand to
remove it.
g
Grasp the bobbin case, and then gently lift out.
Chapter 7
APPENDIX
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the machine before cleaning
it. Otherwise, injury may result.
Note
• In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it. Storing this
machine for an extended period of time without
using it may reduce its efficiency.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
182
h
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and bobbin thread
sensor and the surrounding area.
1 Cleaning brush
2 Race
3 Bobbin thread sensor
i
Insert the bobbin case so that the mark on the
bobbin case aligns with the
mark on the machine.
* Align the and
marks.
1 mark
2
mark
3 Bobbin case
* Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
j
Insert the tabs on the needle plate into the notches in
the machine.
1 Tabs
2 Notches
k
Press down on the right side of the needle plate to
secure it.
Cleaning the Cutter in the Bobbin Case Area
The cutter below the needle plate should be cleaned. If dust
or lint accumulate on the cutter, it will be difficult to cut the
thread when (Thread cutter button) is pressed or the
automatic thread cutting function is used. Clean the cutter
when the thread is not easily cut.
a
Follow steps a through g in “Cleaning the Race” to
remove the needle plate and the bobbin case.
b
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the cutter in the bobbin case
area.
1 Cutter
c
Insert the bobbin case and attach the needle plate
following steps
i through k in “Cleaning the Race”.
IMPORTANT
• Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
Memo
• If lint or dust collects on the bobbin thread sensor,
the sensor may not operate correctly.
CAUTION
• Never use a bobbin case that is scratched or
has a burr on it. Otherwise the upper thread
may become tangled, and the needle may
break and cause injury. For a new bobbin case,
contact your nearest Brother authorized
service center.
• Be sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed, otherwise the needle may break and
cause injury.
a
b
c
a
b
a
b
c
CAUTION
• Do not touch the cutter, otherwise injuries
may result.
Note
• If the needle plate has been removed, check
machine operations to confirm that installation has
been completed correctly. Refer to “Checking
Machine Operations” on page 186.
a
b
a
BEFORE LENDING OR DISPOSING OF THE PRODUCT
183
APPENDIX
7
Please be sure to reset the settings of your machine to
delete the following data.
• all saved data
• customized settings
• network information
a
Touch , and then touch beside [Reset to
Default].
b
Touch .
Touch Panel is Malfunctioning
If the screen does not respond correctly when you touch a key
(the machine does not perform the operation or performs a
different operation), follow the steps below to make the
proper adjustments.
a
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the main
power switch to OFF and back to ON.
The touch panel adjustment screen appears.
b
Using the included touch pen, lightly touch the center
of each +, in order from 1 to 13.
c
Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it back to ON.
BEFORE LENDING OR DISPOSING
OF THE PRODUCT
Note
• Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
[Deleting...] screen is displayed.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
Note
• Only use the included touch pen to touch the
screen. Do not use a mechanical pencil, pin, or
other sharp object. Do not press too hard on the
screen. Otherwise, damage may result.
Note
• If you finish the screen adjustment and the screen
still does not respond, or if you cannot do the
adjustment, contact your authorized Brother
dealer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
184
If the machine stops operating correctly, check the
following possible problems before requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. If you need
additional help, the Brother Support website offers the
latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.
Visit us at https://s.brother/cpeae/
.
If the problem persists, contact your authorized Brother
dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service center.
Frequent Troubleshooting Topics
Detailed causes and remedies for common troubleshooting
topics are described below. Be sure to refer to this before
contacting your authorized Brother dealer.
Upper Thread is Too Tight
Symptom
* The upper thread appears as a single continuous
line.
* The bobbin thread is visible from the right side of
the fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)
* The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out
when pulled.
* The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles
appear in the fabric.
* The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do
not change even after the thread tension is adjusted.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Bobbin thread visible from right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Right side of fabric
5 Bobbin thread
Cause
Incorrect bobbin threading
If the bobbin thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of the
appropriate tension being applied to the bobbin thread, it
is pulled through the fabric when the upper thread is
pulled up. For this reason, the thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric.
Remedy
Correctly install the bobbin thread. (page 34)
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of Fabric
Symptom
* The thread becomes tangled on the wrong side of
the fabric.
* After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and
sewing cannot continue.
* Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in
the bobbin case.
Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper
thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly pulled
up and the upper thread becomes tangled in the bobbin
case, causing a rattling noise.
Remedy
Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the upper
threading.
a
Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot be removed,
cut the thread with scissors.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” on page 181.
b
Remove the upper thread from the machine.
c
Correct the upper threading by following the
instructions in “Upper Threading” on page 36.
* If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 34 to correctly
install the bobbin.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Upper Thread is Too Tight
page 184
Tangled Thread on Wrong Side of
Fabric
page 184
Incorrect Thread Tension
page 185
Fabric is Caught in the Machine
and Cannot Be Removed
page 185
If the Thread Becomes Tangled
Under the Bobbin Winder Seat
page 186
a
b
c
d
e
TROUBLESHOOTING
185
APPENDIX
7
Incorrect Thread Tension
Symptoms
• Symptom 1: The bobbin thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric.
• Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight
line on the right side of the fabric.
• Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the
wrong side of the fabric.
• Symptom 4: The bobbin thread appears as a straight
line on the wrong side of the fabric.
• Symptom 5: The stitching on the wrong side of the
fabric is loose or has slack.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Bobbin thread visible on right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Right side of fabric
5 Bobbin thread
6 Upper thread visible from wrong side of fabric
Cause/Remedy
Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The bobbin threading is incorrect.
Return the upper thread tension to the standard setting,
and then refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 34 to
correct lower threading.
<With symptoms 3 through 5 described above>
The upper threading is incorrect.
Return the upper thread tension to the standard setting,
and then refer to “UPPER THREADING” on page 36 to
correct the upper threading.
Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not
being used.
The machine needle that should be used depends on the
type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not
being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted
correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped
stitches.
* Refer to “FABRIC/THREAD/NEEDLE
COMBINATIONS” on page 44 to check that a
needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are
being used.
Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
Select an appropriate thread tension. Refer to “Setting the
Thread Tension” on page 58.
The appropriate thread tension differs according to the
type of fabric and thread being used.
* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in
your project.
* When the bobbin thread is visible on the right side of
the fabric.
Set the upper thread tension to a lower number. (Loosen
the thread tension.)
* When the upper thread is visible on the wrong side of
the fabric.
Set the upper thread tension to a higher number.
(Tighten the thread tension.)
Fabric is Caught in the Machine and Cannot
Be Removed
If the fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed,
the thread may have become tangled under the needle plate.
Follow the procedure described below to remove the fabric
from the machine. If the operation cannot be completed
according to the procedure, instead of attempting to complete
it forcefully, contact your nearest Brother authorized service
center.
Removing the Fabric From the Machine
a
Immediately stop the machine.
b
Turn off the machine.
c
Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the
handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 42.
d
Remove the presser foot.
If the thread is entangled on the presser foot, remove the
entangled thread, and then raise the presser foot lever to
remove the presser foot. Otherwise, the presser foot may
be damaged.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on
page 45.
e
Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below it.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with
the following steps to clean the race.
f
Remove the needle plate and bobbin case.
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
* Refer to “Cleaning the Race” on page 181.
Symptom 1 Symptom 3
a
b
c
d
e
a
c
d
e
f
Note
• If the upper threading and bobbin threading are
incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted
correctly. Check the upper threading and bobbin
threading first, and then adjust the thread tension.
TROUBLESHOOTING
186
g
Remove any threads in the race and around the feed
dogs.
* Refer to step h on page 182.
h
Insert the bobbin case and then attach the needle
plate.
* Refer to steps i through k on page 182.
i
Check the condition of the needle, and then install it.
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle.
* Refer to “CHANGING THE NEEDLE” on page 42.
Checking Machine Operations
If the needle plate has been removed, check machine
operations to confirm that installation has been completed
correctly.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select Straight stitch (Middle).
c
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and look from all sides to check
that the needle falls at the center of the opening in the
needle plate.
If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the
machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact
your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
d
Turn off the machine, and then install the bobbin and
presser foot.
Never use a scratched or damaged presser foot.
Otherwise, the needle may break, or sewing
performance may suffer.
* Refer to “Setting the Bobbin” on page 34 and
“CHANGING THE PRESSER FOOT” on page 45.
e
Correctly thread the machine.
* For details on the machine, refer to “UPPER
THREADING” on page 36.
f
Perform trial sewing with normal fabric.
If the Thread Becomes Tangled Under the
Bobbin Winder Seat
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not passed
through the pretension disk correctly, the thread may become
tangled beneath the bobbin winder seat.
Wind off the thread according to the following procedure.
a
Touch to stop the bobbin winding.
b
Cut the thread with scissors near the pretension disk.
1 Pretension disk
1 Cleaning brush
2 Race
Note
• Do not yet install the presser foot and thread.
1 Opening in the needle
plate
2 Handwheel
a
b
a
b
Note
• The thread may have become tangled as a result of
incorrect upper threading. Make sure that the
machine is correctly threaded.
Note
• Incorrect sewing may be the result of incorrect
upper threading or sewing thin fabrics. If there are
poor results from the trial sewing, check the upper
threading or the type of fabric being used.
1 Thread
2 Bobbin winder seat
CAUTION
• Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if
the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin
winder seat. The cutter in the bobbin winder
seat may cause injury.
a
b
a
TROUBLESHOOTING
187
APPENDIX
7
c
Push the bobbin winder switch to the right, and then
remove the bobbin from the shaft and cut the thread
leading to the bobbin in order to be able to completely
remove the bobbin from shaft.
d
Hold the thread end with your left hand, and wind off
the thread clockwise from under the bobbin winder
seat with your right hand as shown below.
List of Symptoms
Check the following possible problems before requesting
service. If the reference page is “*”, contact your
authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
Getting Ready
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Cannot thread the needle.
Needle is not in the correct position.
• Press (Needle position button) to raise
the needle.
10
Needle is installed incorrectly. 42
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Upper threading is incorrect. 36
The needle threader hook is bent and does not
pass through the eye of the needle.
*
The needle threader lever cannot be moved or
returned to its original position.
*
A size 65/9 needle is being used.
• The needle is incompatible with the needle
threader. Manually pass the thread through the
eye of the needle.
38
Cannot lower the presser foot with the presser foot
lever.
Presser foot was raised using (Presser foot
lifter button).
• Press (Presser foot lifter button) to lower
the presser foot.
10
Bobbin thread does not wind neatly on the bobbin.
The thread is not passed through the bobbin
winding thread guide correctly.
31
Bobbin spins slowly. 32
The thread that was pulled out was not wound
onto the bobbin correctly.
32
The empty bobbin was not set on the pin
properly.
30
While winding the bobbin, the bobbin thread was
wound below the bobbin winder seat.
You have not wound the bobbin thread properly
when you initially wound thread on the bobbin.
Ensure that the bobbin thread was properly set in
the guides.
30
TROUBLESHOOTING
188
While Operating
The bobbin thread cannot be pulled up.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 34
Machine does not operate
All keys and buttons have been locked by .
42, 45
Nothing appears in the LCD.
Main power switch is not turned on. 14
The plug of the power cord is not inserted into an
electrical outlet.
14
The LCD screen does not look very clear.
The brightness of the screen is not adjusted. 21
Nothing happens, even if the LCD display is touched
Adjust the screen. 183
The screen has been locked.
• Touch either of the following keys to unlock the
screen.
—
The LCD screen is fogged up.
Condensation has formed on the LCD screen.
• After a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
—
Embroidery unit does not operate.
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. 104
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit
was initialized.
104
Pointer of the embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
does not indicate the position correctly
With thick elastic fabric, the position will be
misaligned only at raised parts in the fabric.
130
With fabric having a very uneven surface, the
position is not correctly aligned.
• The pointer indication should be used only as a
reference.
—
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Machine does not operate.
“Start/Stop” button was not pressed. 10
There is no stitch pattern selected. 49
Presser foot is not lowered. 10
“Start/Stop” button was pressed with the foot
controller attached.
51
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the
machine is set for the sewing speed controller to
control the zigzag stitch width.
20, 51
Needle breaks.
Needle is installed incorrectly. 42
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. 43
Needle is turned or bent. 42
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
44
Wrong presser foot was used. 197
Upper thread tension is too tight. 58, 147
Fabric is pulled during sewing. —
Spool cap is set incorrectly. 36
There are scratches around the opening in the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the opening
in the needle plate. This is not a scratch.
*
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
*
There are scratches on the bobbin case. *
Needle is defective. 42
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
30
Upper threading is incorrect. 36
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 34
Presser foot is attached incorrectly. 45
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. 45
Fabric is too thick. 65
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric
or thick seams.
65
Stitch length is too short. 58
1 Notch
a
TROUBLESHOOTING
189
APPENDIX
7
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being
embroidered.
126
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 30
Upper thread breaks.
Machine is not threaded correctly (used the
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread
did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.)
36
Knotted or tangled thread is being used. —
The selected needle is not appropriate for the
thread being used.
44
Upper thread tension is too tight. 58, 147
Thread is twisted. —
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Needle is installed incorrectly. 42
There are scratches around the opening of the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the opening
in the needle plate. This is not a scratch.
*
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
*
There are scratches on the bobbin case. *
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
44
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
30
The thread is tangled on the wrong side of the fabric.
Upper threading is incorrect. 36
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
44
The upper thread is too tight.
The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. 34
Bobbin thread breaks.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 34
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 30
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t
rotate properly.
34
Thread is twisted. —
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
1 Notch
a
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
30
Fabric puckers.
There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin
threading.
34, 36
Spool cap is set incorrectly. 36
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
44
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. 58
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 58, 147
Wrong presser foot was used. 197
The stitch is not sewn correctly.
The presser foot that is used is not appropriate
for the type of stitch that you wish to sew.
197
The thread tension is incorrect. 58
The thread is tangled, for example, in the bobbin
case.
181
Skipped stitches
Machine is threaded incorrectly. 36
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
44
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Needle is installed incorrectly. 42
Needle is defective. 42
Dust or lint has collected under the needle plate. 181
Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn. 66
No stitching
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 34
Upper threading is incorrect. 36
High-pitched sound while sewing
Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. 181
Pieces of thread are caught in the race. 181
Upper threading is incorrect. 36
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not used.
30
There are needle holes or friction scratches in the
bobbin case.
181
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
TROUBLESHOOTING
190
After Sewing
Fabric does not feed through the machine.
Feed dogs are set in the down position.
• Touch , and then turn the handwheel to
raise the feed dogs.
76
Stitches are too close together. 58
Wrong presser foot was used. 197
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Thread is entangled. 185
Zigzag foot “J” is slanted on a thick seam at the
beginning of stitching.
65
The fabric feeds in the opposite direction.
The feed mechanism is damaged. *
The needle contacts the needle plate.
The needle clamp screw is loose. 42
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
Fabric being sewn with the machine cannot be
removed.
Thread is tangled below the needle plate. 184
A broken needle has fallen into the machine.
• Turn off the machine, and then remove the
needle plate. If the needle that fell into the
machine can be seen, use tweezers to remove
it. After removing the needle, return the needle
plate to its original position.
Before turning on the machine, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you to check that it turns
smoothly. If the handwheel does not turn
smoothly or the needle that fell into the
machine cannot be removed, consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
185
The handwheel feels sluggish when it is turned.
Thread is tangled in the bobbin case. 184
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
Thread tension is incorrect.
Upper threading is incorrect. 36
Bobbin is set incorrectly. 34
Using improper needle or thread for the selected
fabric.
44
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. 45
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 58, 147
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. 30
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. 42
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine is
not being used.
30
Character or decorative stitch patterns are misaligned.
Stitch pattern adjustment settings were set
incorrectly.
95
Stitch pattern does not turn out.
Wrong presser foot was used. 197
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics or
stretch fabrics.
66
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 58, 147
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle while
it was being sewn.
• Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands so
that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
49
The thread is tangled, for example, in the bobbin
case.
184
TROUBLESHOOTING
191
APPENDIX
7
The pattern is not embroidered correctly.
Thread is twisted. —
Thread tension is set incorrectly. 58, 147
Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly
(fabric was loose, etc.).
127
Stabilizing material was not attached.
• Always use stabilizing material, especially with
stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, fabrics with a
coarse weave, or fabrics that often cause
pattern shrinkage. See your authorized Brother
dealer for the proper stabilizer.
126
There was an object placed near the machine, and
the carriage or embroidery frame hit the object
during embroidering.
104
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with the
arm, so the embroidery unit cannot move.
• Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so
that the excess fabric is away from the arm, and
rotate the pattern 180 degrees.
127
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit cannot
move freely.
• Place a large thick book or similar object under
the arm head to lightly lift the heavy side and
keep it level.
—
Fabric is hanging off the table.
• If the fabric is hanging off the table during
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not move
freely. Place the fabric so that it does not hang
off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
138
Fabric is snagged or caught on something.
• Stop the machine and place the fabric so that it
does not get caught or snagged.
—
Embroidery frame was removed during
embroidering (for example, to reset the bobbin).
The presser foot was bumped or moved while
removing or attaching the embroidery frame, or the
embroidery unit was moved.
141
Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it is
smaller than the embroidery frame.
126
Loops appear on the surface of the fabric when
embroidering
The thread tension is incorrectly set. 147
The tension of the upper thread is incorrectly set
for the combination of the fabric, thread and
pattern being used.
• Use the embroidery needle plate cover.
138
The combination of the bobbin case and bobbin
thread is incorrect.
137
Symptom, Cause/solution
Reference
ERROR MESSAGES
192
Below is an explanation of error messages. Refer to these when necessary (if you touch or do the operation
correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears).
ERROR MESSAGES
Error messages Cause/solution
1
Cannot change the configuration of the characters. This message is displayed when there are too many characters and the
curved character configuration is impossible.
2
Cannot recognize the data for the selected pattern.
The data may be corrupted.
This message is displayed when there is a possibility that the data for the
selected embroidery pattern is corrupted.
3
Change to a larger embroidery frame. This message is displayed when the machine is in embroidery mode and the
small frame is attached, and the selected pattern does not fit in the small
frame.
4
Data volume is too large for this pattern. This message is displayed when the stitch patterns you are editing take up
too much memory, or if you are editing too many stitch patterns for the
memory. For a combined pattern, reduce the number of patterns.
5
Failed to save file. This message is displayed when no more images can be saved on the USB
media. In this case, delete a file from the USB media or use different USB
media.
6
Includes a special pattern that cannot be saved to
external memory. Save the pattern in the machine's
memory.
This message is displayed when you try to save a copyright protected
pattern to USB media.
According to copyright laws, patterns that are illegal to reproduce or edit
cannot be saved to USB media. If this message displays, save the pattern in
the machine’s memory.
7
Lower the presser foot lever.
This message is displayed when (Presser foot lifter button) is pressed
while the presser foot lever is raised and the needle is lowered.
8
Not enough available memory to save the data.
Delete some patterns or use a different media.
This message is displayed when the memory is full and the stitch pattern or
embroidery pattern cannot be saved.
9
OK to recall and resume previous memory? This message appears if the machine is turned off while embroidering, then
turned on again. Touch to return the machine to the condition
(pattern position and number of stitches) when it was turned off. Follow the
procedure described in “If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Runs out of
Thread During Embroidering” on page 141 to align the needle position and
embroider the remainder of the pattern.
10
OK to separate the combined border pattern? This message is displayed when rotating a saved combined pattern in the
embroidery screen.
11
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery frame. This message is displayed when the machine is in embroidery mode, and the
character pattern combination is too large to fit in the embroidery frame.
12
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery frame.
If you plan to add more patterns, rotate the pattern
combination.
This message is displayed when the machine is in embroidery mode and the
combined character pattern is too large for the embroidery frame. You can
rotate the pattern 90 degrees and continue combining characters.
13
Preventive maintenance is recommended. This message is displayed when the machine needs to be maintained.
Once this message appears, it is recommended to take your machine to an
authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service center for
a regular maintenance check. Although this message will disappear and the
machine will continue to function once you touch , the message will
display several more times until the appropriate maintenance is performed.
14
Remove Dual Feed module from the machine. This message appears when you try to start embroidering with the dual feed
foot attached to the machine. Remove the dual feed foot before entering the
embroidery mode.
15
Set the clock. This message appears when the time/date is not set. Set time/date.
(page 14)
16
The "Start/Stop" button does not operate with the
foot controller attached. Remove the foot controller.
This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is pushed to sew
Utility stitches or Character/Decorative stitches while the foot controller is
connected.
ERROR MESSAGES
193
APPENDIX
7
17
The bobbin thread is almost empty. This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is running out.
Although a few stitches can be sewn when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed,
replace with a wound bobbin immediately. When embroidering, touch ,
touch , remove the embroidery frame, and then replace the bobbin
with one wound with plenty of embroidery bobbin thread.
If [Upper and Bobbin Thread Sensor] in the general settings screen of the
machine setting mode is set to [OFF], this message does not appear.
18
The bobbin winder safety device has activated. Is
the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the bobbin is being wound, and the motor
locks because the thread is tangled, etc.
19
The safety device was activated since the main
shaft motor was heated. Is the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the temperature of the motor increases,
activating the safety device. Wait until the temperature decreases. If the error
persists, contact your nearest authorized Brother dealer.
20
The safety device was activated since the main
shaft motor seized. Is the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the motor locks due to tangled thread or for
other reasons related to thread delivery.
21
The safety device was activated since the needle
position sensor malfunctioned.
This message is displayed when an error in the needle position sensor is
detected, activating the safety device. Turn the machine off, then on again. If
the message continues to appear, the machine may be damaged. Contact
your nearest authorized Brother dealer.
22
Turn off the machine before attaching or removing
the needle plate.
This message is displayed when you try to sew with a stitch other than a
middle needle position stitch while the straight stitch needle plate is
installed.
This message is displayed when the needle plate is removed with the
machine on or when the machine is turned on and embroidery mode is
selected.
23
This file cannot be used. This message appears if the file format is incompatible with this machine.
Check the list of compatible file formats. (page 194)
24
This file exceeds the data capacity and cannot be
used. Use a suitable size file.
This message is displayed when the file size exceeds the data capacity of
the machine.
Confirm the file size and format. (page 194)
25
This key cannot be used at this time. This message is displayed when you touch [Sewing Guide] in the screen
other than the Utility Stitch, or touch [Pattern Explanation] in the screen other
than the Utility Stitch or Character/Decorative Stitch.
26
This USB media cannot be used. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible media.
For a list of compatible USB media, visit https://s.brother/cpeae/
.
27
Turn off the power and replace the needle plate. • This message is displayed when the machine is set to embroidery mode or
utility decorative stitch mode from the home page screen while the straight
stitch needle plate or no needle plate is installed.
• This message is displayed when the straight stitch needle plate is installed
while a stitch pattern that cannot be used with that needle plate is
selected.
28
USB media error This message is displayed when an error occurs with the USB media.
For a list of compatible USB media, visit https://s.brother/cpeae/
.
29
When the speed controller is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, the "Start/Stop" button does
not operate.
This message is displayed when the speed control lever is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, and the “Start/ Stop” button is pressed. Set [Width
Control] to [OFF] in the settings screen to use the “Start/Stop” button
(page 20), or use the foot controller to operate the machine (page 75).
Error messages Cause/solution
SPECIFICATIONS
194
*1
The wireless network connection complies with IEEE 802.11b/g/n standards and uses the 2.4 GHz frequency.
A wireless network cannot be set up with WPA™/WPA2™ Enterprise.
Use Design Database Transfer or PE-DESIGN version 11 or later to transfer data from your computer to the machine. For the operating
systems compatible with the software, visit our website https://s.brother/cnekd/
.
*2
“.pmu” stitch data files can be retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the file, it is saved as a “.pmv” stitch data file.
Using data other than that created using this machine or the machine which create “.pmu” data file, may cause the machine to
malfunction.
*3
• Using data other than that saved using our data design systems or this machine may cause this machine to malfunction.
When the machine is used to save a file with any extension, it is saved as a .phx data file.
• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our default thread color sequence.
Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired.
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Specification
Dimensions of machine Approx. 662 mm (W) × 348 mm (H) × 321 mm (D)
(approx. 26-1/16 inches (W) × 13-11/16 inches (H) × 12-5/8 inches (D))
Weight of machine Approx. 17 kg (approx. 37.5 lb)
Dimensions of machine with
embroidery unit attached
Approx. 916 mm (W) × 348 mm (H) × 524 mm (D)
(approx. 36-1/16 inches (W) × 13-11/16 inches (H) × 20-5/8 inches (D))
Weight of machine with embroidery
unit attached
Approx. 20.7 kg (approx. 45.6 lb)
Sewing speed 70 to 1050 stitches per minute
Maximum embroidery speed 1050 stitches per minute
Interfaces
Wireless LAN
*1
Memory Stitch patterns 1 MB
Embroidery patterns 10 MB
My Design Center 100 MB
Data Types
Stitch patterns
*2
.pmv .pmx .pmu .pmi
Embroidery patterns
*3
.pes .phc .phx .dst .pen
Data that can be loaded when
using My Design Center
.jpg (up to 2 MB), .png (up to 2 MB), .bmp (up to 3 MB)
Number of decorative stitch pattern
combinations
Up to 70
Maximum embroidering area 360 mm (H) x 240 mm (W) (approx. 14 inches (H) x 9-1/2 inches (W))
Types of USB Devices/Media that
can be Used
*4
Stitch patterns, Embroidery
patterns
Data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that
meets the following specifications.
• USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory)
Embroidery data can be recalled only from;
•USB External CD/DVD drives
Condition of the [Eco Mode] and
[Shutoff Support Mode]
[Eco Mode] Available time OFF, 10 - 120 (minute)
“Start/Stop” button Green flashing
Suspended function Machine light, Screen display, LED
pointer, Guideline marker
After recovering The machine starts from the
previous operation.
[Shutoff Support Mode] Available time OFF, 1 - 12 (hour)
“Start/Stop” button Green slow flashing
Suspended function All functions
After recovering An error message appears.
You need to turn off and on the
machine to restart.
Compatible image files of the Screen
Saver Image
Format .jpg
File size Max. 150 KB for each image
File dimension 1280 × 1280 pixels or less (If the width is between 800 and 1279
pixels, the image will be displayed at 800 pixels.)
Number allowed 5 or less
Videos that can be played MP4 file format Video - H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio – AAC
Size 450 (H) × 800 (W)
Maximum file size 1 GB
SPECIFICATIONS
195
APPENDIX
7
*4
Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website https://s.brother/cpeae/ for more details.
* Please be aware that some specifications may change without notice.
Note
• We recommend using the 26 letters of the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_” for
the name of the file/folder.
IMPORTANT
• When using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break when
embroidering with a stitch density that is too fine or when embroidering three or more overlapping
stitches. In that case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.
UPDATING YOUR MACHINE’S SOFTWARE
196
You can update your machine’s software using the
following two procedures.
Update Procedure Using USB Media
When an update program is available on https://s.brother/
cpeae/, please download the files following the instructions
on the website and steps below.
a
While pressing (Automatic threading button),
turn the main power to ON.
b
Touch .
c
Insert the USB media into the primary (top) USB port
on the machine.
d
Touch .
When updating is finished, the completion message
appears.
e
Turn the machine off, remove the USB media, and turn
the machine on again.
Update Procedure Using Wireless LAN
Connection
If the machine is connected to a wireless network with a
strong, reliable connection, update files can be downloaded
directly to the machine using this network.
For details on the wireless LAN connection, refer to page 28.
a
Display page 10 of the settings screen.
b
Touch .
* The machine starts to download the update file, if
there is a new update file on server.
1 When the wireless LAN key appears as , touching
causes the machine to check if there is a new
update file. If there is a new file, downloading begins.
c
When downloading is finished, turn off the machine,
then hold down (Automatic threading button)
while turning on the machine.
UPDATING YOUR MACHINE’S
SOFTWARE
Note
• When using USB media to update the software,
check that no data other than the update file is
saved on the USB media being used before
starting to update.
Memo
• The machine periodically checks if there is a new
update file on the server. When there is a new
update file, the wireless LAN key is displayed as
.
Note
• Do not turn off the machine during the download.
• Touch to pause the download. To
restart, touch .
1
STITCH SETTING CHART
197
APPENDIX
7
d
Touch .
e
Touch to update the machine.
* Do not turn off the machine during the update.
*
Twin needle can be used by attaching zigzag foot “J”.
Memo
• If there are changes or additions to functions,
manuals available on the machine may be updated.
STITCH SETTING CHART
Memo
• When any of the following stitches (reverse stitch
patterns and reinforcement stitch patterns) are
selected, pressing (Reverse stitch button) will
sew reverse stitches.
When any other stitch is selected, pressing
(Reverse stitch button) will sew reinforcement
stitches.
• The stitch pattern symbols indicate the following.
1 Reverse stitch pattern
2 Reinforcement stitch pattern
• Advanced monogramming foot “N+” is displayed
as “N” on the screen.
• Values and measurements provided in inches are
approximate. Actual values are provided in the
metric unit of measurement.
Note
• The presser foot that is displayed on each screen
when Free motion mode is OFF/ON is shown in the
table under “Presser foot”.
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J*/O
Straight stitch (Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Straight stitch (Left)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Straight stitch (Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Straight stitch (Middle)
General sewing, gather,
pintuck, etc.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
1
2 2
1
STITCH SETTING CHART
198
J*/O
Triple stretch stitch
General sewing for
reinforcement and
decorative topstitching
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching,
sewing and decorative
applications
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching, top
stitching
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Basting stitch
For basting.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
20 (3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-1/4)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch
For overcasting, mending.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch
For overcasting, mending.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at
left.
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Start from left needle
position, zigzag sew at
right.
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
3 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of light and
medium weight fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of
heavyweight fabric
5.0 (3/16)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
G
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily
friable fabrics or
decorative stitching.
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforced seaming of
stretch fabric
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcing of medium
stretch fabric and
heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J*/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative
stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Single diamond overcast
Reinforcement and
seaming stretch fabric
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Single diamond overcast
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Straight stitch while
cutting fabrics
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 2.5
(0 - 3/32)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Zigzag stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
S
With side cutter
Overcasting stitch while
cutting fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
right seam allowance
5.5 (7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/C
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
—
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.5 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
when using transparent
nylon thread for the upper
thread and a thread color
matching the quilt for the
bobbin thread.
Sew with a tight thread
tension so that the bobbin
thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric.
Use a needle between 90/
14 and 100/16.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting
and sewing on appliqué
quilt pieces
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
199
APPENDIX
7
J/O
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching
binding
1.5 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting stippling
Background quilting
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
R
Blind hem stitch
Hemming woven fabrics
* The stitch width setting
is in neither millimeters
nor inches.
00
3 - 3
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
R
Blind hem stitch stretch
Hemming stretch fabric
* The stitch width setting
is in neither millimeters
nor inches.
00
3 - 3
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
2.5 (3/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Shell tuck edge
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Satin scallop stitch
Decorating collar of
blouse, edge of
handkerchief
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.1 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Scallop stitch
Decorating collar of
blouse, edge of
handkerchief
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Patchwork join stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching,
attaching cord and
couching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Smocking stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative
stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Fagoting cross stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Tape attaching
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
J/O
Ladder stitch
Decorative stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative top stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
5.5 (7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Serpentine stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stippling
stitch
Decorative stitching
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at left
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, triple
straight at center
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching zigzag
Decorative hems, top
stitching
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems, lace
attaching pin stitch
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems
3.0 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems daisy
stitch
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
200
N*/O
Honeycomb stitch
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Honeycomb stitch
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems and
bridging stitch
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N*/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems.
Fagoting, attaching ribbon
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems,
smocking
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Ladder stitch
Decorative hems.
Fagoting, attaching ribbon
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
A
Narrow rounded
buttonhole
Buttonhole on light to
medium weight fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Wide round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra
space for larger buttons
5.5 (7/32)
3.5 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Tapered round ended
buttonhole
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
A
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical
bar tack in heavyweight
fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Round ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes with bar tack
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Round double ended
buttonhole
Buttonholes for fine,
medium to heavyweight
fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Narrow squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes for light to
medium weight fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Wide squared
buttonhole
Buttonholes with extra
space for larger
decorative buttons
5.5 (7/32)
3.5 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Squared buttonhole
Heavy-duty buttonholes
with vertical bar tacks
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Stretch buttonhole
Buttonholes for stretch or
woven fabrics
6.0 (15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.0 (1/16)
0.5 - 2.0
(1/32 - 1/16)
A
Heirloom buttonhole
Buttonholes for heirloom
and stretch fabrics
6.0 (15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.5 (1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
A
Bound buttonhole
The first step in making
bound buttonholes
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 6.0
(0 - 15/64)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
A
Keyhole buttonhole
Buttonholes in
heavyweight or thick
fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole
Buttonholes in medium to
heavy weight fabrics for
larger flat buttons
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Keyhole buttonhole
Buttonholes with vertical
bar tack for reinforcement
in heavyweight or thick
fabrics
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 1
Left side of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 2
Bar tack of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 3
Right side of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
201
APPENDIX
7
N/O
4 steps buttonhole 4
Bar tack of 4 step
buttonhole
5.0 (3/16)
1.5 - 7.0
(1/16 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
A
Darning
Darning of medium weight
fabric
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
A
Darning
Darning of heavyweight
fabric
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
A
Bar tack
Reinforcement at opening
of pocket, etc.
2.0 (1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
0.4 (1/64)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
M
Button sewing
Attaching buttons
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 4.5
(3/32 - 3/16)
—
N/O
Eyelet
For making eyelets, holes
on belts, etc.
7.0 (1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
7.0 (1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
N/O
Star eyelet
For making star-shaped
eyelets on holes.
——
N/O
Diagonally left up
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Reverse (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Diagonally right up
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Sideways to left
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N/O
Sideways to right
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N/O
Diagonally left down
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Forward (Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Diagonally right down
(Straight)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
N/O
Sideways to left (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N/O
Sideways to right
(Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
——
N/O
Forward (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
N/O
Reverse (Zigzag)
For attaching appliqué on
tubular pieces of fabric
and mitering corners
——
J/C
Piecing stitch (Middle)
Piecework/patchwork
—
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Right)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
right seam allowance
5.50 (7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Piecing stitch (Left)
Piecework/patchwork 6.5
mm (approx. 1/4 inch) left
seam allowance
1.50 (1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Basting stitch
Basting
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
20 (3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-1/4)
J/O
Stem stitch
Reinforced stitching,
sewing and decorative
applications
1.00 (1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting appliqué zigzag
stitch
Zigzag stitch for quilting
and sewing on appliqué
quilt pieces
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
J/O
Zigzag stitch (Right)
Start from right needle
position, zigzag sew at left
3.50 (1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Zigzag stitch (Left)
Start from left needle
position, zigzag sew at
right
3.50 (1/8)
2.50 - 5.00
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.6 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
2 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium
weight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
3 steps elastic zigzag
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch
fabrics), tape and elastic
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting appliqué stitch
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching
binding
2.00 (1/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
202
J/O
Shell tuck edge
Shell tuck edge finish on
fabrics
4.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Blanket stitch
Appliqués, decorative
blanket stitch
3.50 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Quilting stippling
Background quilting
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Stretch knit seam
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Tape attaching
Attaching tape to seam in
stretch fabric
5.50 (7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Serpentine stitch
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Feather stitch
Fagoting, decorative
stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Fagoting cross stitch
Fagoting, bridging and
decorative stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Couching stitch
Decorative stitching,
attaching cord and
couching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
Patchwork stitches,
decorative stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Smocking stitch
Smocking, decorative
stitching
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Rick-rack stitch
Decorative top stitching
4.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching and
appliqué
6.00 (15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
5.50 (7/32)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Heirloom, decorative
hems
5.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Hemstitching
Decorative hems and
bridging stitch
6.00 (15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Single diamond overcast
Reinforcement and
seaming stretch fabric
6.00 (15/64)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
J/O
Overcasting stitch
Reinforcement of stretch
fabric or decorative
stitching
4.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
N/O
Appliqué stitch
Appliqués, decorative
stitch
3.00 (1/8)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Blanket stitch
Appliques, decorative
blanket stitch
4.00 (3/16)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Decorative stitch
Decorative stitching
7.00 (1/4)
0.00 - 7.00
(0 - 1/4)
0.4 (1/64)
0.1 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
X
Free motion couching
stitch
Free motion couching
stitch
3.50 (1/8)
2.75 - 3.75
(3/32 - 1/8)
–
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
–
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
–
J/O
Hand-look quilting
Quilting stitch made to
look like hand quilting
stitch
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
–
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.1 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
5.0 (3/16)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
1.4 - 5.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
5.0 (3/16)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
1.4 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
STITCH SETTING CHART
203
APPENDIX
7
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
1.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 4.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
2.0 - 5.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
2.5 - 4.0
(3/32 -
3/16
)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
1.4 - 4.0
(1/16 -
3/16
)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
2.0 - 4.0
(1/16 -
3/16
)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
4.0 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
2.5 - 4.0
(3/32 -
3/16
)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
6.0 (15/64)
4.0 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
0.3 (1/64)
0.2 - 2.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
6.0 (15/64)
4.0 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
0.3 (1/64)
0.2 - 2.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
3.5 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.3 (1/64)
0.1 - 2.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
4.0 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 4.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
4.0 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
2.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
4.5 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
2.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
1.6 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
N/O
Tap eri ng s tit ch
Stitch pattern can be
tapered at the beginning
or at the end of sewing.
7.0 (1/4)
4.0 - 7.0
(3/16 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
2.0 - 4.0
(1/16 - 3/16)
Stitch
Presser
foot
Stitch name/
Applications
Stitch
width
(mm
(inch))
Stitch
length
(mm
(inch))
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
INDEX
204
A
Accessory compartment ............................................................... 11
Adjustments
screen
.................................................................................... 183
Advanced multi-function foot controller
...................................... 51
Air vent
.......................................................................................... 9
Alphabet characters
embroidery
............................................................................ 107
Appliqué
quilting
.................................................................................... 75
using an embroidery frame pattern
......................................... 155
Arrow keys
................................................................................. 100
Automatic fabric sensor system
.................................................... 62
Automatic thread cutting key
....................................................... 60
Automatic threading button
................................................. 10, 36
B
Ball point needle .......................................................................... 44
Bar tacks
...................................................................................... 88
Blind hem stitches
........................................................................ 79
Block move key
......................................................................... 101
Bobbin
pulling up the bobbin thread
.................................................... 35
setting
...................................................................................... 34
winding
.................................................................................... 30
Bobbin case
cleaning
................................................................................. 181
Bobbin clip
.................................................................................. 11
Bobbin cover
......................................................................... 9, 34
Bobbin threading
pulling up the bobbin thread
.................................................... 35
setting the bobbin
.................................................................... 34
winding the bobbin
.................................................................. 30
Bobbin winder
............................................................................... 9
Bobbin winding switch
................................................................ 32
Border key
....................................................................... 114, 117
Button sewing
.............................................................................. 89
4 hole buttons
.......................................................................... 89
shank
....................................................................................... 89
Buttonhole lever
............................................................................ 9
Buttonholes
four-step
................................................................................... 85
odd-shaped/buttons that do not fit the button holder plate
....... 85
one-step
................................................................................... 83
C
Character/Decorative Stitches
adjustments
.............................................................................. 95
retrieving
.................................................................................. 98
saving
...................................................................................... 97
Cleaning
race
........................................................................................ 181
Clock
........................................................................................... 14
Color shuffling function
............................................................. 121
Compact dual feed foot
................................................................ 46
Cord guide bobbin cover
............................................................. 71
Couching patterns
...................................................................... 156
D
Darning ....................................................................................... 87
Dart seam
.................................................................................... 69
Decorative fill pattern
................................................................ 159
Denim
......................................................................................... 44
Deselect region setting
............................................................... 119
E
Echo quilting ...................................................................... 78, 159
Eco mode
.................................................................................... 23
Editing
embroidery edit
..................................................................... 111
Embroidery
2-point embroidery positioning function
................................ 133
adjusting the speed
................................................................ 150
automatic thread cutting function (End color trim)
................. 149
key functions
......................................................................... 124
resuming embroidery after turning off the power
................... 141
selecting patterns
................................................................... 105
thread color display
............................................................... 151
thread trimming function (Jump stitch trim)
............................ 150
Embroidery appliqué
................................................................. 139
Embroidery edit
changing the thread color
...................................................... 120
key functions
......................................................................... 111
repeated patterns
................................................................... 114
Embroidery foot “W+” with LED pointer
................................... 103
Embroidery frames
attaching
............................................................................... 129
inserting fabric
....................................................................... 127
removing
............................................................................... 129
types
...................................................................................... 127
using the embroidery sheet
.................................................... 128
Embroidery needle plate cover
.................................................. 138
Embroidery patterns
checking the position
............................................................ 132
editing
................................................................................... 111
embroidering
......................................................................... 137
linked characters
................................................................... 152
retrieving
............................................................................... 154
saving
.................................................................................... 153
selecting
................................................................................ 105
using a frame pattern to make an appliqué
............................ 155
Embroidery sheet
....................................................................... 128
Embroidery unit
......................................................................... 104
Error messages
........................................................................... 192
Eyelet
.......................................................................................... 90
F
Fabric .......................................................................................... 44
Fabrics
sewing heavyweight fabrics
..................................................... 65
sewing lightweight fabrics
....................................................... 66
sewing stretch fabrics
....................................................... 66, 85
Fagoting
...................................................................................... 82
Favorite color scheme
............................................................... 123
Feed dogs
............................................................................... 9, 76
Flat bed attachment
.............................................................. 9, 104
Flat fell Seam
............................................................................... 70
Foot controller
........................................................................ 9, 51
Advanced Multi-Function Foot Controller
................................ 51
Free motion quilting
free motion echo quilting foot “E”
........................................... 78
free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
.................................... 77
free motion quilting foot “C”
................................................... 76
Free motion sewing mode
........................................................... 76
G
Gathering .................................................................................... 69
Grid direction key
..................................................................... 100
Guideline marker
........................................................................ 60
H
Handle .......................................................................................... 9
INDEX
INDEX
205
APPENDIX
7
Handwheel .................................................................................... 9
Home page screen
....................................................................... 16
I
Image key .................................................................................. 113
Insert key
................................................................................... 101
K
Key functions
embroidery
............................................................................ 124
embroidery edit
..................................................................... 111
MY CUSTOM STITCH
............................................................. 99
utility stitches
........................................................................... 18
Knee lifter
.............................................................................. 9, 62
L
L/R Shift ....................................................................................... 58
LCD screen
............................................................................ 9, 16
light
......................................................................................... 21
Leather
........................................................................................ 66
M
Machine help key ........................................................................ 24
Main power switch
........................................................................ 9
Metallic thread
............................................................................ 31
MPEG-4 (MP4) videos
................................................................. 26
Multi-directional sewing
.............................................................. 90
MY CUSTOM STITCH
................................................................. 99
retrieving
............................................................................... 101
My Design Center
...................................................................... 161
My Design Snap App
................................................................. 179
My Stitch Monitor App
.............................................................. 178
N
Needle ........................................................................................ 44
changing the needle
................................................................ 42
changing the needle position
................................................... 67
mode
....................................................................................... 17
twin needle
.............................................................................. 39
Needle bar thread guide
........................................................ 9, 40
Needle mode selection key
......................................................... 39
Needle plate
.................................................................................. 9
Needle position
................................................................... 62, 67
Needle position button
................................................................ 10
O
Operation buttons ................................................................. 9, 10
Overcasting
................................................................................. 72
P
Piecing ........................................................................................ 73
1/4 piecing foot with guide
...................................................... 74
Pintuck
........................................................................................ 70
Pivoting
....................................................................................... 61
Power cord
.................................................................................. 14
Power cord receptacle
................................................................... 9
Presser foot
pressure
................................................................................... 62
removing
................................................................................. 45
types
...................................................................................... 197
Presser foot code
....................................................................... 124
Presser foot holder
................................................................. 9, 45
Presser foot holder screw
............................................................... 9
Presser foot lever
................................................................... 9, 65
Presser foot lifter button
............................................................... 10
Presser foot/Needle exchange key
................................ 39, 42, 45
Pretension disk
............................................................... 9, 32, 33
Q
Quilting ....................................................................................... 73
free motion
.............................................................................. 76
with satin stitches
..................................................................... 75
R
Race .......................................................................................... 181
Reinforcement stitch
.................................................................... 55
Reinforcement stitch button
......................................................... 10
Repeated patterns
...................................................................... 114
Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns
.......................................... 98
embroidery patterns
............................................................... 154
machine’s memory
......................................................... 98, 154
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................... 101
stitch settings
............................................................................ 59
utility stitches
........................................................................... 59
Reverse stitch button
.................................................................... 10
Reverse/Reinforcement stitches
.................................................... 55
S
Satin stitches ................................................................................ 75
Saving
character/decorative stitches
.................................................... 97
embroidery patterns
............................................................... 153
machine’s memory
......................................................... 97, 153
stitch settings
............................................................................ 59
utility stitches
........................................................................... 59
Scallop stitches
............................................................................ 81
Screen saver
................................................................................. 23
Set key
....................................................................................... 100
Settings
automatic thread cutting
................................................ 60, 149
embroidery settings
.................................................................. 22
general settings
........................................................................ 21
machine settings key
................................................................ 20
sewing settings
......................................................................... 20
stitch length
............................................................................. 58
stitch width
.............................................................................. 57
thread tension
................................................................ 58, 147
thread trimming
..................................................................... 150
Sewing speed controller (speed control slide)
................. 9, 10, 49
Sewing type selection key
............................................................ 25
Shelltuck stitches
......................................................................... 81
Shutoff support mode
................................................................... 23
Single/Triple stitching key
.......................................................... 100
Smocking stitches
........................................................................ 81
Speaker
........................................................................................ 21
Specifications
............................................................................. 194
Spool cap
....................................................................................... 9
Spool net
..................................................................................... 31
Spool pin
....................................................................................... 9
Spool stand
.......................................................................... 34, 41
Stabilizer
.................................................................................... 126
Start/Stop button
.......................................................................... 10
Starting point key
....................................................................... 151
Step stitch patterns
....................................................................... 96
Stippling
.................................................................................... 159
Stitch setting chart
...................................................................... 197
Stitch tapering function
................................................................ 93
Straight stitch foot
........................................................................ 63
Straight stitch needle plate
........................................................... 63
Straight stitches
............................................................................ 67
Supplemental spool pin
................................................. 9, 30, 40
T
Tape or elastic attaching .............................................................. 82
Thread
......................................................................................... 44
thread tension
................................................................ 58, 147
Thread color display
.................................................................. 151
Thread color palette
................................................................... 120
INDEX
206
Thread cutter ......................................................................... 9, 51
Thread cutter button
.................................................................... 10
Thread guide
........................................................... 9, 31, 33, 40
Thread guide plate
......................................................... 9, 33, 37
Thread marks
............................................................................. 117
Touch pen
......................................................................... 16, 183
Transparent nylon thread
..................................................... 32, 44
Trial key
..................................................................................... 132
Troubleshooting
......................................................................... 184
Tutorial video
.............................................................................. 25
Twin needle
................................................................................. 39
U
Updating .................................................................................... 196
Upper thread
............................................................................... 44
Upper threading
twin needle mode
.................................................................... 39
using the Automatic threading button
....................................... 36
USB mouse
.................................................................................. 30
USB port
........................................................................................ 9
Utility stitches
key functions
............................................................................ 18
pattern explanation key
............................................................ 26
retrieving
.................................................................................. 59
saving
...................................................................................... 59
sewing type selection key
......................................................... 25
stitch setting chart
.................................................................. 197
V
Vinyl fabrics ................................................................................. 66
Z
Zigzag stitches ............................................................................. 71
Zipper insertion
centered
................................................................................... 91
side
.......................................................................................... 91
My Stitch Monitor is a mobile app that monitors the operating conditions of your
machine.
Visit the Google Play™ or App Store to download.
Google Play™ App Store
My Design Snap is a mobile app that you can position your embroidery designs on
the fabric, by capturing image of the hooped fabric and sending the image to your
machine.
Visit the Google Play™ or App Store to download.
Google Play™ App Store
Design Database Transfer is a dedicated Windows application for wirelessly
transferring embroidery data from a computer to the machine. This application can
also be used to view and manage embroidery data.
Visit us at https://s.brother/caeka/ to download the application.
English
882-W73
D02M40-001
Please visit us at https://s.brother/cpeae/ where you
can get product support and answers to frequently asked
questions (FAQs).
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only. Local Brother companies or
their dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.
Various optional accessories are available to be
purchased separately.
Visit our website
https://s.brother/coeka/.
Be sure to install the latest software.
A variety of functional improvements are being performed in the latest version.
Brother SupportCenter is a mobile app that provides the support
information for your Brother product.
Visit the Google Play™ or App Store to download.
Google Play™ App Store
